Konica Minolta Universal Remote VI 300 User Manual

Polygon Editing Tool  
Instruction Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruction manual for each model in  
the VIVID series of non-contact 3D  
digitizers  
VIVID digitizers offers rapid, high-precision 3D scanning ideal for imaging of in-  
dustrial products in a wide range of shapes and configurations. This manual describes the  
digitizer’s features and operating procedures, and calls attention to relevant precautions.  
Photogrammetry System  
PSC-1 Instruction Manual  
Explains the PSC-1 system, a high-precision alignment system based on photographic  
measurement technology. This system is for use in the VIVID 9i only.  
This manual explains how to set up the Bench Top Frame Set, which offers more  
stable measurements both horizontally and vertically, and how to attach the VIVID  
910(VI-910) or VIVID 900(VI-900) to the set. This frame set is for use with VIVID  
910(VI-910) or VIVID 900(VI-900) only.  
Bench Top Frame Set  
Instruction Manual  
Safety Precautions  
When using this software, the following points must be strictly observed to ensure correct and safe use.  
After you have read this manual, keep it in a safe place so that it can be referred to easily whenever it is needed.  
Failure to adhere to the following points may  
result in death or serious injury  
WARNING  
To ensure correct and safe use of this software, please read the instruction manuals of the VIVID (VI)  
series digitizer and personal computer in addition to this manual before operating. Incorrect operation of the  
software may result in fire or electric shock.  
Software Restrictions  
• Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this software and manual without KONICA MI-  
NOLTA SENSING’s permission is strictly prohibited.  
• The specifications of the software are subject to change without prior notice.  
• KONICA MINOLTA SENSING will not take any responsibility for damage caused as result of use of this  
software.  
Notes On Use  
• When inserting a CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, make sure that it is placed straight in the right direction,  
and inserted gently.  
• Keep the CD-ROM clean. If it becomes dirty, a reading or writing error may result.  
• Pay attention to rapid temperature changes and dew condensation.  
• Keep the CD-ROM away from direct sunlight or heaters.  
• Do not let the CD-ROM drop or be exposed to strong shocks.  
• Keep the CD-ROM away from water, alcohol, thinner etc.  
Notes On Storage  
• Do not store the CD-ROM in a hot area, for instance, in direct sunlight or near heaters.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Safety Precautions ..............................................................................................................................................1  
Software Restrictions..........................................................................................................................................1  
Notes On Use......................................................................................................................................................1  
Notes On Storage................................................................................................................................................1  
Conventions for Command Reference (Chapter 2).............................................................................................6  
Chapter 1 Foreword  
Preparations  
1) Introduction of Operating Conditions........................................................................................................................ 8  
2) Attaching the protect key to the computer .................................................................................................................. 9  
3) Installing the ASPI driver software on the computer.................................................................................................. 10  
4) Installing Polygon Editing Tool on the computer ....................................................................................................... 11  
5) Connecting the VIVID (VI) digitizer to the computer (necessary only if the VIVID (VI) digitizer will be controlled from the software)....... 13  
Regarding the software  
1) Starting and exiting from the software....................................................................................................................... 16  
2) Main window, toolbar and icons ................................................................................................................................ 17  
Uninstalling  
1) Uninstalling Polygon Editing Tool............................................................................................................................... 19  
2) Uninstalling the protect key (HASP) driver software .................................................................................................. 20  
Chapter 2 Command Reference  
File Menu  
File  
New  
Open  
Save  
Creating New Scene Data  
Opening Saved Data  
Saving Element Data  
24  
24  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
Elements  
Scene  
Elements  
Scene  
Elements  
Digitizer  
Saving Scene Data  
Save as  
Saving Element Data under a Different Name  
Saving Scene Data under a Different Name  
Importing Scanned Data  
Import  
Import  
One Scan  
Step Scan  
PC Card  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 9i  
33  
50  
74  
103  
118  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 910  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 900 or VIVID 910  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 700  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 300  
Import  
Import  
Digitizer  
Digitizer  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 9i  
41  
58  
79  
106  
121  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 910  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 900 or VIVID 910  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 700  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 300  
Importing Data from the Memory Card of VIVID 910  
67  
Importing Data from the Memory Card of VIVID 900 or VIVID 910 96  
Importing Data from the Memory Card of VIVID 700  
Aligning Multiple Scans (for VIVID 910 only)  
Performing Precision Registration of Scan Data  
Exporting Element Data as Various Formats  
Exporting Image Data as Various Formats  
Removing the Selected Element (s)  
Displaying Information for Setting Conditions  
Selecting a Digitizer  
Exiting the Polygon Editing Tool  
111  
126  
136  
137  
140  
141  
142  
144  
145  
Easy Align  
PSC-1  
Export  
Elements  
Images  
Elements  
Preferences  
Select Digitizer  
Exit  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• View Menu  
View  
Orbit  
Zoom  
Full Frame All  
Full Frame Displaying  
Area Orbit  
Rotating or moving the Camera Position  
Enlarging/Reducing the Displayed Item  
Displaying Data Fully in all Windows  
Data Fully in Active Window  
148  
149  
150  
150  
151  
Chapter  
1
Preparations  
Rotating the Camera and Setting the Rotation Center  
Area Zoom  
Move Plane  
Move Light  
Camera Settings  
Image  
Enlarging/Reducing Item Enclosed by Specified Rectangle 152  
Regarding  
Setting Display Depth  
153  
154  
155  
156  
156  
156  
the software  
Moving the Light  
Uninstalling  
Setting the Camera Parameters  
Displaying Color Images  
Displaying/Hiding the Element List  
Displaying the Toolbar  
Show Element List/Hide Element List  
Show Toolbar  
Chapter  
2
• Select Menu  
File  
Menu  
Select  
Point  
Selecting/Unselecting a Point by Clicking the Mouse  
Selecting/Unselecting Points within Specified Rectangle Area  
Selecting Points within Specified Bezier Curve  
Selecting Only the Boundary of Holes of Element (s)  
Selecting Only the Boundary of Holes of Points  
Selecting Points within Specified Homogeneous Area  
158  
159  
160  
162  
162  
163  
View  
Menu  
Rectangle  
Bezier  
Boundary – Elements  
Boundary – Points  
Color  
Select  
Menu  
Edit  
Menu  
Toggle Points  
Select by Elements  
Unselect by Elements  
Select Front  
Reversing Selection State of Points of Selected Element (s) 165  
Build  
Menu  
Selecting All the Points of Element (s)  
Unselecting All the Points of Element (s)  
165  
166  
Info  
Menu  
Selecting Only the Points Comprising Polygons that are Both Visible and at the Front 166  
Window  
Menu  
• Edit Menu  
Edit Undo  
Tool  
Menu  
Canceling the Previous Operation  
Performing the Canceled Operation  
168  
168  
169  
170  
170  
171  
178  
179  
Redo  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
Delete – Elements  
Delete – Points  
Delete – Polygons  
Images  
Define  
Recalc LOD  
Deleting the Selected Elements from the Element List  
Deleting the Selected Points  
Deleting Polygons Comprised of Selected Points  
Editing the Texture of Selected Element  
Defining Points as a New Element  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element List  
Pop-up Menus  
in Image Window  
Recalculating the Simplified Display Data  
Chapter  
3
Error  
Messages  
Explanation of  
Technical Terms  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Build Menu  
Build  
Registration  
Initial  
Fine  
Manual  
Auto  
Elements  
Points  
Performing Initial Registration of Elements Manually  
Performing Initial Registration of Elements Automatically  
Performing Fine Registration of Elements  
Performing Fine Registration of Selected Points  
Moving the Selected Points  
Moving Element (s)  
Moving the Element (s) to the Origin  
Converting the Coordinate System of Element  
Rotating Element (s)  
Merging Elements  
182  
184  
185  
186  
187  
189  
191  
192  
198  
200  
201  
202  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
214  
215  
216  
218  
Move  
Points  
Elements  
To Origin  
To X-Y-Z  
Elements  
Rotate  
Merge  
Fill Holes  
Manual  
Auto  
Element  
Points  
Filling Holes Manually  
Filling Holes Automatically  
Smoothing the Selected Element  
Smoothing the Selected Points  
Smooth  
Subsample  
Uniformly  
Element  
Points  
Element  
Points  
Reducing the Number of Points of the Selected Element Uniformly  
Reducing the Selected Points Uniformly  
Reducing the Number of Points of the Selected Element Adaptively  
Reducing the Selected Points Adaptively  
Rebuilding the Selected Element by Deleting Small Polygons  
Rebuilding the Selected Points by Deleting Small Polygons  
Rebuilding the Selected Element by Dividing Large Polygons  
Rebuilding the Selected Points by Dividing Large Polygons  
Dividing Polygons in Elements into Triangles  
Dividing Selected Polygons into Triangles  
Blending Textures  
Adaptively  
Modify  
Element  
Points  
Element  
Points  
Elements  
Polygons  
Subdivision  
Triangulate  
Texture Blending  
Check Polygons  
Element  
Polygons  
Checking for Illegal Polygons in Element  
Checking for Illegal Polygons Composed of Selected Points  
• Info Menu  
Info  
Info  
Points  
Picked Point  
Elements  
Displaying Information for the Element (s)  
Displaying Information for Points  
Displaying Information for the Picked Point  
222  
223  
224  
Window Menu  
Window  
New  
Front/Right/Left/Back/Top/Bottom/Isometric/Perspective  
Changing Direction of View of Element view window  
226  
226  
227  
227  
228  
228  
228  
229  
229  
230  
232  
232  
Clone  
Close  
Cascade  
Tiling  
Layout  
Cloning an Element view window  
Closing Active Element view window  
Cascading Element view windows  
Tiling Element view windows  
1/4  
1/1  
Format A  
Format B  
Displaying an Element view windows in 1/4 Layout  
Displaying an Element view window in 1/1 Layout  
Displaying an Element view window in Format A Layout  
Displaying an Element view window in Format B Layout  
Displaying Window Properties  
Property  
Next  
Previous  
Displaying Next Element view window  
Displaying Previous Element view window  
• Tool Menu  
Tool  
Measure  
Menu Add  
Menu Del  
Measuring Dimensions within the Selected Element (s)  
Adding a Menu  
Deleting an Added Menu  
234  
241  
241  
242  
Shortcut Keys  
Displaying a List of Shortcut Keys  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Pop-up Menus in Element view window  
View Mode  
Front/Right/Left/Back/Top/Bottom/Isometric/Perspective  
Changing View Mode  
Wireframe/Shading/Texture Mapping/Wireframe + Shading/Wireframe + Texture Mapping  
Changing Rendering Mode  
244  
Rendering Mode  
Chapter  
1
244  
244  
245  
245  
245  
246  
247  
247  
248  
Preparations  
Show Vertex/Hide Vertex  
Show Normal/Hide Normal  
Show Axis/Hide Axis  
Smooth Shading/Flat Shading  
Select element from window  
Create clone window  
Close window  
Showing or Hiding Vertices  
Showing or Hiding Normal Vectors  
Showing or Hiding Axes  
Regarding  
the software  
Changing Shading Mode  
Uninstalling  
Changing Displayed Element by Windows  
Cloning an Element view window  
Closing an Element view window  
Displaying Window Properties  
Property  
• Pop-up Menus in Element List  
Show Element/Hide Element  
Delete Elements  
View Image  
Set Wireframe Color  
Set Shading Color  
Chapter  
2
Showing/Hiding Elements  
Deleting Elements from the Element List  
Displaying Color Images  
Changing Wireframe Color  
Changing Shading Color  
250  
250  
251  
251  
252  
252  
File  
Menu  
View  
Menu  
Select  
Menu  
Rename Element  
Changing an Element Name  
Edit  
Menu  
• Pop-up Menus in Image Window  
Change Image  
Overlay  
Zoom In  
Zoom Out  
Actual Pixels  
Close  
Build  
Menu  
Changing the Color Image  
Displaying Wireframe on a Color Image  
Enlarging the Color Image  
Reducing the Color Image  
Displaying the Color Image in One-to-One Pixel Mode  
Closing the Color Image  
254  
254  
254  
255  
255  
255  
Info  
Menu  
Window  
Menu  
Tool  
Menu  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element List  
Chapter 3 Appendix  
Pop-up Menus  
in Image Window  
Error Messages ...............................................................................................................................................259  
Explanation of Technical Terms......................................................................................................................264  
Coordinate System ................................................................................................................................................. 264  
Window View........................................................................................................................................................... 264  
Vertex...................................................................................................................................................................... 264  
Polygon................................................................................................................................................................... 264  
Color Image............................................................................................................................................................. 264  
Element ................................................................................................................................................................... 265  
Scene...................................................................................................................................................................... 265  
Camera Data File .................................................................................................................................................... 265  
Element File............................................................................................................................................................. 265  
Scene File ............................................................................................................................................................... 266  
Dynamic Range Expansion Function...................................................................................................................... 266  
Chapter  
3
Error  
Messages  
Explanation of  
Technical Terms  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conventions for Command Reference (Chapter 2)  
Chapter 2 “Command Reference” (from page 21) gives an explanation of the function and operating procedure  
of each command in the menu order.  
The shortcut key and the icon (displayed on the tool bar) are also shown in the command title.  
We recommend that you make extensive use of shortcut keys when running this software. Note that while  
software keys indicated in the command reference are effective by default, you are free to add new shortcuts  
and to customize the existing ones.  
Ref.  
For information about using and customizing shortcut keys, see page 242.  
Command name  
Description of the command  
Shortcut key  
View – Zoom  
[Z] (Effective while held down)  
Command  
icon  
Enlarging/Reducing the Displayed Item  
This command is used to enlarge (zoom-in) or reduce (zoom-out) the displayed item, or to move the camera to  
change the view angle.  
Ref.  
Note  
For a description of camera position, refer to the View – Camera Settings command (page 155).  
View – Zoom mode will be active when this command is selected. To cancel the View – Zoom mode, execute the View  
– Zoom command again. However, if you are executing this command using the shortcut key, the View – Zoom mode  
can be canceled by releasing the key.  
Left  
: zoom-in, zoom-out  
Mouse  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: Drags the camera.  
functions  
Chapter  
2
Chapter and  
Nenu entry  
View  
Menu  
Operating Procedure  
The monochrome monitor image currently cap-  
tured by the VIVID 900/910 will appear in the  
Image area of the dialog box.  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
[Digitizer] and then [Step Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog  
1
box will appear.  
2
3
Place the object on the rotating stage.  
910  
900  
In Chapter 2,  
it shows the  
model name.  
To display the object in the middle of  
the window, change the position of the  
object or move the VIVID 900/910 back  
and forth to change the view angle.  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the VIVID  
900/910.  
The left column shows  
detailed explanations of  
each step.  
The right column shows the  
outline of the procedure.  
* This sample page is for explanatory purposes.  
Actual pages will be different.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
1
Preparations  
Regarding  
the software  
Uninstalling  
Chapter  
1
F o r w a r d  
Chapter 1 explains the preparations for using Polygon EditingTool.  
The method for uninstalling the software from the computer is also  
explained.  
Preparations  
1) Introduction of Operating Conditions....................................8  
2) Attaching the protect key to the computer............................9  
3) Installing the ASPI driver software on the computer ...........10  
4) Installing Polygon Editing Tool on the computer.................11  
5) Connecting the VIVID (VI) digitizer to the computer  
(necessary only if the VIVID(VI) digitizer will be controlled from the software) ......13  
Regarding the software  
1) Starting and exiting from the software ................................16  
2) Main window, toolbar and icons..........................................17  
Uninstalling  
1) Uninstalling Polygon Editing Tool........................................19  
2) Uninstalling the protect key (HASP) driver software............20  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparations  
Chapter  
1
Preparations  
1) Introduction of Operating Conditions  
The following hardware environment is required to run this software.  
Hardware  
CPU  
PC/AT compatible  
Piuentm 4 or higher recommended (only Intel)  
1024 MB or more (2048 MB or more recommended)  
15 MB free space is required to install this software.  
Main memory  
HDD  
Windows XP Professional SP2 (32 bit)  
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition SP2 (64 bit)  
Windows Vista Business Edition SP2 (32 bit)  
Windows Vista Business x64 Edition SP2 (64 bit)  
Windows 7 Professional (32 bit)  
Windows 7 Professional (64 bit)  
* This software runs as the 32 bit application software on the 64 bit OS.  
Applicable OS  
Graphic  
A graphic board that supports Open GL and enables 16-bit color display with a resolu-  
tion of 1024 by 768 pixels or higher is required.  
USB port for the protect key  
SCSI port for VIVID control  
Interface  
Adaptec SCSI interface board and ASPI layer (Ver. 4.70 or higher) must be installed.  
*
* When Windows Vista or Windows 7 is used, the RATOC Systems Inc.’s USB2.0-  
UltraSCSI converter U2SCX must be used.  
Other  
A CD-ROM drive is required to install the software.  
Note  
To install and use this software, a login must be made by a user who has Administrator authority.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Connecting the protect key to the computer  
When using Polygon Editing Tool, it is necessary to attach the protect key and install the protect key (HASP)  
driver to the computer before installing Polygon Editing Tool.  
Attach the protect key to the computer correctly according to the following procedure.  
Chapter  
1
Preparations  
Memo  
The installation procedure is also given in the “READ-  
ME_E.txt” file in the “Polygon Editing Tool” directory of  
the software’s CD-ROM.  
n
Installing the protect key driver software (HASP driver) on the computer  
In order for the protect key to be recognized by the corresponding driver software, it is necessary to install the  
driver software on the computer before connecting the protect key to the computer.  
Operating Procedure  
Start Windows and insert the software  
CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
1
From Explorer, execute the “HASPUser-  
Setup.exe” file stored in the CD-ROM.  
The driver setup program will start.  
2
Follow the instructions displayed on the  
screen to complete installation.  
The protect key driver will be installed.  
3
n Connecting the protect key  
Connect the protect key to the USB port of the computer.  
Insert the protect key into the computer’s USB port straightly and carefully.  
*
Connect the protect key to the  
computer’computer’s USB port.  
1
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3) Installing the ASPI driver software to the computer  
The software uses SCSI as the interface connecting the VIVID and the computer.  
For the computer to recognize VIVID correctly, it is necessary to install the ASPI driver software on the  
computer.  
Even if the VIVID will not be connected to the computer, it is still necessary to install the ASPI driver.  
Chapter  
1
*
Preparations  
Note  
When Windows Vista or Windows 7 is used, it is necessary to install the driver software of the RATOC Systems Inc.’s USB2.0-Ul-  
traSCSI converter U2SCX on the computer. Be careful not to install the Adaptec ASPI driver software, because it cannot control the  
VIVID digitizer.  
To install the USB2.0-UltraSCSI converter driver software, refer to “About installation of U2SCX” below.  
Operating Procedure  
Start up Windows, and set the Polygon  
Editing Tool CD-ROM into the computer’s  
CD-ROM drive.  
1
Using Explorer, access the CD-92ROM  
drive and double-click on “aspi_v***.  
exe”.  
Memo  
2
The “aspi_v .exe” file stores the driver and installa-  
tion software in self-compressed form. Double-clicking  
on“aspi_v .exe” causes the file to automatically decom-  
press into multiple files.  
Memo  
Proceed to install the driver as de-  
scribed below.  
3
About the details of installation, refer to the decom-  
pressed “Readme.txt” file.  
Memo  
Double-click on the decompressed  
“ASPIINST.EXE” file.  
The driver install program starts up.  
4
If you use Windows XP, select [Run] from the [Start]  
menu, and then run the decompressed “INSTALL.BAT”  
file added “XP32” parameter as following dialog. The  
install program starts to install.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to  
complete the installation.  
The install program installs the ASPI driver.  
5
n About installation of U2SCX  
It is necessary to install Polygon Editing Tool on the computer before installing the driver software of the  
USB2.0-UltraSCSI converter.  
Operating Procedure  
Start Windows and insert the software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
1
From Explorer, open the “U2SCX for Vista” (when using Windows Vista) or “U2SCX for  
Win7” (when using Windows 7 ) directory in the CD-ROM.  
2
Proceed to install the driver as described on “Installation of Emulation Driver” in U2SCX_  
InstallGuide.  
3
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4) Installing Polygon Editing Tool on the computer  
When installing the software, make sure to install it correctly according to the following procedure.  
Memo  
It is necessary to connect the protect key to the computer  
correctly before installing the software.  
Chapter  
1
If the protect key has not yet been connected, connect the  
protect key to the computer according to the procedure on  
page 9.  
Preparations  
Operating Procedure  
Start Windows and insert the software  
CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
1
Below are display examples when Windows Vista is used.  
From Explorer, execute the “setup.exe”  
file stored in the CD-ROM.  
The setup program will start.  
2
Click the [NEXT] button.  
A dialog asking whether you agree with the  
program agreement will appear.  
3
Note  
Read it thoroughly and select whether you agree or not.  
If you agree, proceed to step 4.  
If you do not agree, the software cannot be installed.  
Click the [Cancel] button to cancel installation.  
Select [ I accept the terms in the license  
agreement. ] and click the [NEXT] but-  
ton.  
4
If you want to install the software in another directory,  
Memo  
click the [Change...] button and select the desired direc-  
tory. If you do not specify another directory, the software  
will be installed in “C:\Program Files (x86)\KONICA  
MINOLTA” in case of a 64-bit OS or “C:\Program Files\  
KONICA MINOLTA” in case of a 32-bit OS.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click the [NEXT] button and click the  
[Install] button.  
5
6
Chapter  
1
Preparations  
Follow the instructions displayed on the  
screen to complete installation.  
The Polygon Editing Tool will be installed.  
When installation is completed successfully,  
the following files will be created in the direc-  
tory where the software has been installed.  
KONICA MINOLTA  
Polygon Editing Tool Ver.*.**  
Bin  
PET.exe  
Plugin  
AddTexture.dll  
Memo  
The files that will be created will change according to the  
selected installation type.  
Memo  
When the application software runs for the first time, the “..KONICA MINOLTA\Polygon Editing Tool Ver.*.** \Model” folder  
will be created in My Documents.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5) Connecting the VIVID digitizer to the computer  
When the VIVID digitizer will be controlled from Polygon Editing Tool, connect the VIVID digitizer to the  
computer first, and then start up Polygon Editing Tool.  
The first time the VIVID digitizer is connected to the computer, it is necessary for the computer to recognize  
the VIVID digitizer as an external device.  
Chapter  
1
Preparations  
Perform operations according to the following procedure.  
n Connecting the VIVID digitizer to the computer  
In order for the protect key to be recognized by the corresponding driver software, it is necessary to install the  
driver software on the computer before connecting the protect key to the computer.  
Operating Procedure  
Turn the POWER switch of the comput-  
er OFF.  
1
Connect the VIVID digitizer to the com-  
puter.  
2
Memo  
For details on how to connect the VIVID digitizer to the  
computer, refer to the instruction manual of each model  
of the VIVID digitizer.  
Set the POWER switch of the VIVID  
digitizer to ON (set switch to “I” mark).  
Initializing of the digitizer will start.  
3
0/7%2  
3#3)  
!# ).  
After MENU appears in the finder of  
the digitizer, switch on the computer to  
start the Windows operating system.  
4
Note  
The POWER switch of the digitizer should be set to ON  
first before switching on the computer.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Recognition of the VIVID digitizer by the computer  
The first time the VIVID digitizer is connected to the computer, cause the computer to recognize the VIVID digi-  
tizer as an external device by following the procedure below.  
Note  
It is not necessary to install the device driver of the VIVID digitizer on the computer; however, Polygon Editing Tool cannot  
control the digitizer until recognition has been completed.  
Chapter  
1
Preparations  
Operating Procedure  
After connecting the digitizer to the  
1
computer, switch on the computer.  
The digitizer will be recognized by the  
computer as a new external device, and  
then the Hardware Wizard will start.  
A dialog confirming whether or not to  
2
connect to Windows Update will ap-  
pear first. Check the “No, not this time”  
checkbox and then click “Next”.  
When a dialog for confirming the driver  
3
installation method appears, check the  
“Install from a list or specific location  
(Advanced)” checkbox and then click  
“Next”.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When a dialog for specifying the de-  
sired driver search method appears,  
check the “Search for the best driver in  
these locations.” radio button, clear any  
other checkbox for specifying the loca-  
tion, and then click “Next”.  
4
5
6
Chapter  
1
Preparations  
If a dialog with the message “Cannot  
Install this Hardware” appears, check  
the “Don’t prompt me again to install  
this software.” checkbox and then click  
“Finish”.  
Start the device manager to confirm  
whether or not the VIVID digitizer has  
been properly recognized by the com-  
puter.  
Right-click the “My Computer” icon and select  
“Properties” in the popup menu. When the  
“System” dialog appears, click “Device Man-  
ager” in the “Hardware” tab.  
Alternately, open the “Control Panel” from the  
“Start” menu, double-click the “System” icon  
to display the “System Properties” dialog, and  
then click “Device Manager” in the “Hardware”  
tab.  
If the name showing the VIVID digitizer such  
as “VIVID XXX Scanner Device” appears in  
the “Other devices” section, recognition of the  
digitizer has been completed.  
Memo  
marks may be displayed on the device icon. This  
is not a problem.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Regarding the software  
Chapter  
1
1) Starting and Quitting the Software  
Regarding  
the software  
n Starting the Software  
Operating Procedure  
From the [Start] menu, select [Program]  
1
–[KONICA MINOLTA], and then click  
[Polygon Editing Tool Ver.*.**].  
The Polygon Editing Tool will start.  
• If a scene file with the name “startup.scn” current-  
ly exists in the directory named “Polygon Editing  
Tool Ver.*.**”  
Model”, the program will automatically load this  
file as it starts up.  
Note  
When Windows Vista is used and the user account con-  
trol is available, the [User Account Control] dialog box  
will appear. Click the [Continue] button.  
When Windows 7 is used and UAC (User Account  
Control) is set to other than “Never notify”, the [User  
Account Control] dialog box will appear. Click the [Yes]  
button.  
n Quitting the Software  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Exit] on the [File] menu.  
The software will be exited.  
1
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Main Window  
1. Title bar  
2. Menu bar  
3. Tool bar  
Chapter  
1
4. Element list  
Regarding  
the software  
5. Window tile  
6. Element view window  
7. Status bar  
1. Title bar.......................... Displays the file name of the currently displayed image data.  
2. Menu bar....................... Used to select various functions of this software.  
3. Tool bar ......................... Displays the icons of the frequently used commands. Clicking an icon will ex-  
ecute the corresponding command.  
4. Element list ................... Displays the names of all the elements currently opened by this software. High-  
lighted elements mean that they have been selected by an operation (e.g. by a  
menu). To select/unselect an element, just click its name.  
If you place a checkmark next to an element name, the element will appear in the  
Element view window. To toggle the display of all selected elements on or off,  
press the space bar or the [Ctrl] key.  
5. Window title.................. Indicates the orientation of the image shown in the window. It is possible to open  
two or more windows having the same orientation. In the Isometoric or Perspec-  
tive window, the image can be rotated in different directions using the [Orbit],  
[Camera Settings] commands of the [View] menu.  
6. Element view window ..... Displays the elements whose corresponding checkboxes are checked (i.e. a check  
mark is displayed).  
7. Status bar...................... Displays the function of each button of the mouse according to the currently  
selectedcommand. (The functions vary with the currently selected command.)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Toolbar Icons  
Icon  
Command  
Description  
Reference Page  
24  
Chapter  
1
Open an element file or scene file.  
File – Open  
Regarding  
Saves element data.  
26  
File – Save – Elements  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan  
File – Import – Digitizer – PSC-1  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Edit – Delete – Points  
the software  
33, 50, 74,  
103, 118  
Reads in the data from a 1-shot scan by the digitizer.  
Reads in the data from a step-shot scan by the digi-  
tizer.  
41, 58, 79,  
106, 121  
Performing Precision Registration of Scan Data  
* for VIVID 9i only; Additional license is required.  
136  
126  
170  
148  
149  
150  
152  
230  
230  
230  
166  
159  
160  
166  
165  
162  
182  
189  
198  
200  
202  
201  
205  
244  
Aligns multiple scans taken by the digitizer.  
Deletes a point(s) selected for the currently displayed  
element.  
Rotating / moving the camera position  
Enlarges/reduces the window.  
Fully frames the element in the window.  
Enlarges/reduces the selected area.  
Displays the wireframe.  
View – Orbit  
View – Zoom  
View – Full Frame All  
View – Area Zoom  
Wireframe (Window – Property)  
Shading (Window – Property)  
Texture (Window – Property)  
Select – Select Front  
Displays the image in shading mode.  
Texture-maps the image.  
Selects a group of polygon points that are at the front  
and visible.  
Selecting points within the specified rectangle area.  
Selecting points within the specified Bezier curve.  
Unselects all the points inside the element.  
Reverses the selection state of the points.  
Select the points on the boundary of the element.  
Select – Rectangle  
Select – Bezier  
Select – Unselect by Element  
Select – Toggle Points  
Select – Boundary – Elements  
Build – Registration – Initial – Manual  
Build – Move – Elements  
Build – Rotate – Elements  
Build – Merge  
Performs initial registration of the specified corre-  
sponding points of elements.  
Moves the currently selected elements.  
Rotates the elements.  
Merges elements to form one element.  
Fills holes in the element automatically.  
Build – Fill Holes – Auto  
Build – Fill Holes – Manual  
Build – Smooth – Points  
Show Vertex/Hide Vertex  
Creates polygon data for the specified points to fill  
holes in the element.  
Smoothens the boundary of the specified points.  
Showing or Hiding Vertices  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uninstalling  
Chapter  
1
1) Uninstalling the Polygon Editing Tool  
To uninstall the software, use the standard uninstall program of Windows.  
Uninstalling  
Remarks  
The software will be deleted one folder at a time. If you have a file(s) you want to keep, copy it to another folder before start-  
ing uninstallation.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [Start] menu, select [Setting]  
and then click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] window will appear.  
1
Double-click the “Add/Remove” icon,  
2
select “Polygon Editing Tool” from the  
list that appears, and then click the  
[Add/Remove] button.  
The uninstall program will start.  
Follow the instructions displayed on the  
screen to complete uninstallation.  
3
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Uninstalling the Protect Key Driver  
To uninstall the protect key driver, use the standard uninstall program of Windows.  
Chapter  
1
Memo  
Before uninstalling the protect key driver, make sure that  
the protect key is removed from the computer.  
Operating Procedure  
Uninstalling  
Remove the protect key from the com-  
puter’s USB port.  
1
From the [Start] menu, select [Setting]  
and then click [Control Panel].  
The [Control Panel] window will appear.  
2
Double-click the “Add/Remove” icon,  
3
select “HASP Device Driver” from the  
list that appears, and then click the  
[Change/Remove] button.  
The uninstall program will start.  
Follow the instructions displayed on the  
screen to complete uninstallation.  
The protect key driver will be uninstalled.  
4
Memo  
After the protect key driver has been uninstalled, restart  
the computer.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
View  
Menu  
Select  
Menu  
Command Reference  
Edit  
Menu  
Build  
Menu  
Chapter 2 explains the functions of Polygon Editing Tool, using as key-  
words the commands that can be selected from the menus of the main  
window and/or icons of the toolbar.  
Info  
Menu  
Window  
Menu  
In addition, the scanning procedure for storing 3-dimensional data by  
controlling the digitizer from Polygon Editing Tool is also explained.  
Tool  
Menu  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element List  
Pop-up Menus  
in Image Window  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File Menu  
New……………………………………………………………………………………24  
Open ……………………………………………………………………………………24  
Save – Elements …………………………………………………………………………26  
Save – Scene ……………………………………………………………………………27  
Save as – Elements ………………………………………………………………………28  
Save as – Scene …………………………………………………………………………29  
Import – Elements ………………………………………………………………………30  
Import – Digitizer – One Scan  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• When VIVID 9i is Selected ……………………………………………………33  
• When VIVID 910 is Selected……………………………………………………50  
• When VIVID 900/910 is Selected ………………………………………………74  
• When VIVID 700 is Selected………………………………………………… 103  
• When VIVID 300 is Selected………………………………………………… 118  
Import – Digitizer – Step Scan  
• When VIVID 9i is Selected ……………………………………………………41  
• When VIVID 910 is Selected……………………………………………………58  
• When VIVID 900/910 is Selected ………………………………………………79  
• When VIVID 700 is Selected………………………………………………… 106  
• When VIVID 300 is Selected………………………………………………… 121  
Import – Digitizer – PC Card  
• When VIVID 910 is Selected……………………………………………………67  
• When VIVID 900/910 is Selected ………………………………………………96  
• When VIVID 700 is Selected………………………………………………… 111  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Import – Digitizer – Easy Align ……………………………………………………… 126  
Import – Digitizer – Photogrametry System PSC-1 ………………………………… 136  
Export – Elements …………………………………………………………………… 137  
Export – Images ……………………………………………………………………… 140  
Remove Elements …………………………………………………………………… 141  
Preferences …………………………………………………………………………… 142  
Select Digitizer ……………………………………………………………………… 144  
Exit …………………………………………………………………………………… 145  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – New  
Creating New Scene Data  
[Ctrl] + [N]  
This command is used to delete the current scene and open a new scene.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [New] on the [File] menu.  
The current scene will be deleted and a new  
blank scene will be generated.  
1
• If modifications have been made to an element  
after it has been imported or saved, the “Some el-  
ements are modified. Do you want to save them?”  
message dialog box will appear.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• To save the element data, click the [Yes] but-  
ton.  
• Clicking the [No] button will display the new  
scene without saving the element data.  
Ref.  
For details of how to save elements, refer to the File  
– Save – Elements command (page 26).  
File – Open  
Opening Saved Data  
[Ctrl] + [O]  
This command is used to load an element file or scene file that has been saved using the File – Save – Elements  
command etc.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Open] on the [File] menu.  
1
The [File-Open] dialog box will appear.  
• The dialog box shows a list of files. If all the files  
cannot be displayed on one page, a scroll bar will  
be displayed.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Open  
Select the file you want to load.  
If you select an element file with an attached  
image and you have also checked the Preview  
box, the display area will show a preview im-  
age.  
2
3
• To display files of a certain format only, select the  
desired format from the [File of type] pull-down  
menu.  
Note  
Memo  
• It is not possible to select files of different formats.  
• In the case of scene files, only one file can be opened.  
• It is not possible to open scene files which have been  
saved using the Utility Software VI-S1.  
In the case of element files, it is possible to select two  
or more files by clicking them while holding down the  
[Shift] or [Ctrl] key. If two or more files are selected, the  
preview image can be switched from one file to another  
using the [BACKWARD] and [FORWARD] buttons.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Open] button.  
The data of the selected file(s) will be loaded  
and displayed in the element view window.  
• If an element has already been loaded, the Warn-  
ing dialog box shown on the right will appear.  
qClick the [OK] button.  
When an element file is loaded:  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after the  
software is started, it will be fully framed in all  
the windows including those that are hidden.  
• The names of the loaded elements will also ap-  
pear in the element list, indicating that the ele-  
ments have been selected (highlighted).  
All the elements that have already been loaded  
will be deleted, and the data of the scene file  
will be displayed.  
When a scene file is loaded:  
• The element list will show the names of the ele-  
ments contained in the scene, and the view infor-  
mation of each element will be loaded.  
Memo  
A clock icon will be displayed during loading.  
The state in effect when a scene file was saved  
can be restored. However, it cannot always be  
restored completely, for example, if elements in  
the file have been set not to be displayed.  
Parameters for [File-Open] Dialog Box  
9i  
Select the folder containing the file to open.  
Look in  
910  
900  
700  
300  
File name selected on the list is displayed.  
File name  
File of type  
Preview  
Data format of the selected file is displayed.  
If you check the Preview box, the [File - Open] dialog box will display preview images of those  
element files that have attached images.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Save – Elements  
Saving Element Data  
[Ctrl] + [S]  
This command is used to save the data selected in the element list. The data will be saved under the current  
element file name.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the  
element(s) to be saved.  
1
Memo  
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
From the [File] menu, select [Save] and  
then click [Elements].  
The selected element data will be saved under  
2
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• If the selected elements are newly created ele-  
ments or those that are loaded in another file for-  
mat, the same dialog box as the one that appears  
when the File – Save as – Elements command  
is selected will appear, displaying the element  
names in the order they are selected.  
the current file name.  
qIf you want to change the file name, change it  
and click the [Save] button.  
• The first element will be saved, and a dialog  
box for the next element will appear.  
• If you click the [Cancel] button, the next ele-  
ment and subsequent elements will not be  
saved.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Save as – Elements com-  
mand, refer to page 28.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Save – Scene  
Saving Scene Data  
This command is used to save the current scene data under the current scene file name.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Save] and  
then click [Scene].  
The elements comprising the scene and its  
1
• If the scene is one that has been newly created,  
view information will be saved under the cur-  
rent scene file name.  
the same dialog box as the one that appears when  
the File – Save as – Scene command is selected  
will appear.  
qEnter the desired file name, and click the  
[Save] button.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
The scene will be saved.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Save as – Scene command,  
refer to page 29.  
Memo  
If no elements are present, only the view information will  
be saved.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Save as – Elements  
Saving Element Data under a Different Name  
This command is used to save the data selected in the element list under a different file name.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the  
element to be saved.  
1
Memo  
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
From the [File] menu, select [Save as]  
and then click [Elements].  
The [File-Save as-Elements] dialog box will  
2
Chapter  
2
appear.  
File  
Menu  
• If two or more elements have been selected, their  
names will be displayed in the order they are  
displayed in the element list.  
If you want to change the file name,  
enter a new file name.  
3
4
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
Changing the file name will not cause the element  
names to change.  
Click the [Save] button.  
The first element will be saved, and a dialog  
box for the next element will appear.  
• When all the elements are saved, the dialog box  
will close.  
• If you click the [Cancel] button, the next element  
and subsequent elements will not be saved.  
Memo  
By selecting “Element files Ver.1.x” from the [Save as  
type] pull-down menu, the elements can be saved under  
the format of the Utility Software VI-S1.  
Note  
If the elements are saved under the format of the Utility  
Software VI-S1, data attached to the images may be lost.  
Parameters for [File-Save As-Elements] Dialog Box  
9i  
Select the folder for saving file.  
Input the name of file to save.  
Select format for saving file.  
Save in  
910  
900  
700  
300  
File name  
Save as type  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Save as – Scene  
Saving Scene Data under a Different Name  
This command is used to save the current scene data under a different file name.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Save as]  
1
and then click [Scene].  
The [File-Save as-Scene] dialog box will ap-  
pear.  
Enter the desired file name, and click  
the [Save] button.  
The scene comprising the elements and its  
2
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
view information will be saved.  
Memo  
• If no elements are present, only the view information  
will be saved.  
• If you want the scene file to start up automatically the  
next time you run the program, save it into the “Poly-  
gon Editing Tool Ver.*.**/Model” directory and give it  
the name “startup.scn”. When the program starts it will  
check for this file, and if the file exists it will automati-  
cally load it.  
Note  
• The scene data can not be loaded using the Utility  
Software VI-S1.  
• The file name must consist of alphanumeric charac-  
ters only.  
Parameters for [File-Save As-Scene] Dialog Box  
Select the folder for saving file.  
Save in  
Input the name of file to save.  
Select format for saving file.  
File name  
Save as type  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Elements  
Importing Scanned Data  
This command is used to import the raw scan data that was saved when the object was scanned by the VIVID  
(VI) series digitizer.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import]  
1
and then click [Elements].  
The [File-Import-Elements] dialog box will ap-  
pear.  
• The dialog box shows a list of files. If all the files  
cannot be displayed on one page, a scroll bar will  
be displayed.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
From the [File of type] pull-down menu,  
select the format of importing data.  
2
Item  
Explanation  
CAM (*.cam)  
CDM (*.cdm)  
CDK (*.cdk)  
STL (*.stl)  
Scan data for VIVID 300 or 700  
Scan data for VIVID 900 or 910  
Scan data for VIVID 9i  
ASCII or Binary-type STL.  
Select the file you want to import.  
If you select an element file with the attached  
image and you have also checked the Preview  
box, the display area will show a preview im-  
age.  
3
4
Memo  
• If you select data files having two or more data, the  
[BACKWARD] and [FORWARD] buttons will be  
active, allowing you to display a preview image of each  
data.  
• It is possible to select two or more files by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key. If  
two or more files are selected, the preview image can  
be switched from one file to another using the [BACK-  
WARD] and [FORWARD] buttons.  
Note  
• It is not possible to select files of different formats.  
• Although it is possible to import STL format data, no  
guarantee will be given if it contains illegal polygons.  
Set various parameters including re-  
duce rate.  
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu. “Adaptive” is  
able to be selected when the CDK format is setting.  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes caused  
by missing data, set the [File Holes] setting to “On”.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Elements  
• When importing data, if you want to perform dark  
correction for color data, check the [Dark Correc-  
tion] checkbox.  
• When importing data, if you want to perform log  
correction for color data, check the [Log Correc-  
tion] checkbox.  
Click the [Import] button.  
5
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
The data will be imported and displayed in  
the element view window. The names of the  
imported elements will also appear in the ele-  
ment list, indicating that the elements have  
been selected (highlighted).  
Chapter  
2
• When the data is loaded for the first time after the  
software is started, it will be fully framed in all  
the windows including those that are hidden.  
File  
Menu  
• In the case of data acquired using the File – Im-  
port – Digitizer – Step Scan command, each  
data will be subjected to registration when the  
file is opened, and then the resulting data will be  
displayed. A dialog box will also appear asking  
whether you want to perform fine-registration.  
qClick the [OK] button.  
Fine-registration will be performed.  
Memo  
A progress bar will be displayed during loading.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Elements  
Parameters for [File-Import-Elements] Dialog Box  
Select the folder containing the element file to import.  
File name selected on the list is displayed.  
Look in  
File name  
Data format of the selected file is displayed.  
File of type  
Reduction Rate  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of the  
following: “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”, “Adaptive”.  
Note  
Selecting “Adaptive” reduces data adaptively. This option is displayed only if the CDK format is selected.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is On, the pro-  
Fill Holes  
Remove  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the  
following: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
None:  
Boundary (B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons  
within the specified angular range (5°, 10°, 15° , or 20°) to the  
view vector.  
Filter  
None:  
Noise Filter (N.F.):  
The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be  
corrected according to other data.  
High Quality (H.Q.):  
The program filters out unreliable data. (Effective only when  
importing data that was scanned using the VIVID 9i or the VIVID  
910.)  
H.Q & N.F.:  
Applies both noise filter and high quality filter. (Effective only  
when importing data that was scanned using the VIVID 9i or the  
VIVID 910.)  
If this box is checked, the program applies dark correction when importing color data.  
If this box is checked, the program applies log correction when importing color data.  
If this box is checked, the program displays color data.  
Dark Correction  
Log Correction  
Preview  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 9i  
This command is used to cause the VIVID 9i (VI-9i) to scan the object one scan at a time using the remote  
control function of this software. Registration of multiple scan data can be performed by manually designating  
their corresponding points.  
Once registration is complete, the data can be saved together with the coordinate conversion parameters pro-  
vided for registration as a single data file (CDK). The data is then registrated and three-dimensionalized based  
upon the saved coordinate conversion parameters using the File-Import commands.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Operating Procedure  
When using VIVID 9i for the first time  
1
or when the lens has been exchanged,  
field calibration must be performed us-  
ing a Field Calibration System.  
Place a Field Calibration System that is suit-  
able for the lens to be used, and click the  
[Calibration] button in the [File-Import-Digi-  
tizer-One Scan] dialog box to start field cali-  
bration.  
Note  
User calibration must also be performed when using  
VIVID 9i after long periods of non-use or when exces-  
sive changes in the environment (temperature, humid-  
ity) have occurred.  
Ref.  
For details on user calibration, refer to VIVID 9i  
Instruction Manual.  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
2
[Digitizer] and then [One Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
• The monochrome monitor image captured by the  
VIVID 9i will appear in the Work window area of  
the dialog box.  
9i  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Set an object in place.  
If you are going to use the rotating stage,  
place the object on it.  
3
To display the object in the middle of  
4
the Work window area, change the po-  
sition of the object or move the instru-  
ment back and forth to change the view  
angle.  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the instrument.  
If the lenses are changed, carry out field calibration using  
the Field Calibration System.  
Chapter  
2
Click the [Option] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option]  
dialog box will appear.  
File  
Menu  
5
6
Set optional parameters.  
Item  
Explanation  
Scan Parameter  
Convert Parameter  
Sets the settings for scanning.  
Sets the settings for three-  
dimensionalization.  
Stage Parameter  
Select the rotary stage to be  
used.  
[Default] button  
Clicking this restores the  
default settings.  
Ref.  
For details, refer to parameters (P.39) for [File-Im-  
port-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box.  
• Select the desired stage in [Stage Parameter] field,  
and click on the [Apply] button. If the stage has  
been recognized properly, a stage slide bar will be  
displayed at the bottom of the work window when  
the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option]  
dialog box is closed.  
9i  
• If initialization is not successful, turn off the  
power to the rotary stage power, turn it on again,  
and then click on the [Apply] button.  
After necessary settings are made,  
click the [OK] button.  
7
The settings will be set and the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box will  
close.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Click the [Scan] button to acquire the  
first scan data.  
A scan will start, and a color image will be  
8
Memo  
If [Use Color] is not checked (i.e. no check mark is  
shown), The scan data has no color image data, and a gray-  
scale image will be displayed instead of a color image.  
displayed in the Work window area.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• Clicking on the following radio buttons will make  
a change to the image displayed in the Work win-  
dow area. The data acquired during the scan will  
remain unchanged.  
Item  
Explanation  
[Mono] radio  
button  
The current image is displayed in  
monochrome.  
[Color] radio  
button  
The color image acquired from  
the scan is displayed.  
[Pitch] radio  
button  
The distance data is displayed  
in the color that is shown in the  
Near-Far color slide bar ac-  
cording to the distance from the  
object to the digitizer.  
• Clicking the [Color Read] button will re-scan for  
the color data only. The distance data will not be  
updated.  
• Clicking the [Edit] button enables you to delete  
the area that is not necessary for three-dimen-  
sionalization by specifying it using the mouse.  
Messages will appear at the bottom of the Work  
window area as shown right, so follow them to  
operate the mouse.  
Click the [Edit] button again to exit the edit mode.  
9i  
• Switch to pitch display screen, and right-click on  
desired position in the screen while holding down  
[CTRL] key. The Z-axis coordinates at that posi-  
tion (distance from VIVID 9i) will appear.  
To specify distance manually and perform mea-  
surement, this value must be used.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Click the [Store] button.  
The color data displayed in the Work window  
area will appear in the Store Window area.  
9
Note  
The [Store] button will be disabled (displayed in gray)  
when clicked once. This will prevent the same Work  
window area’s data from being stored repeatedly.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Acquire the second scan data. Move  
the object so that 3 pairs of corre-  
sponding points or 1 or more pairs of  
corresponding points can be set be-  
tween the first scan data and the sec-  
ond and subsequent scan data.  
10  
First Scan Data  
9i  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Click the [Scan] button.  
11  
At this time, the data in the Work window area  
does not correspond to the one in the Store  
window area, so a red frame is displayed.  
RED  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Designate three or more corresponding  
points. Set the corresponding points in  
the Work window area and then store  
window alternately. When the corre-  
sponding points have been designated  
properly, the red frame will turn to blue.  
12  
Memo  
Registration with 1 pair of corresponding points must be  
used for objects with characteristic shape.  
Since registration may not be performed successfully for  
objects with non-characteristic shape (e.g. flat planes, cy-  
lindrical surfaces), using 3 pairs of corresponding points  
is recommended  
• Each time corresponding points are designated,  
registration among data is performed.  
If desired points are set by left-clicking them,  
registration will be performed each time 3 or  
more pairs of corresponding points are set.  
By using middle button or left button + [Shift]  
button, registration can be performed when 1  
or more pairs of corresponding points are set.  
• If the [Auto Store] checkbox has been checked,  
proceed to Step 13 after the corresponding points  
are designated properly.  
Left  
: Sets a point.  
(Registration is performed using 3 or more pairs of corresponding points)  
Middle  
: Sets a point.  
([Shift] + Left) (Registration is performed using 1 or more pairs of corresponding points)  
Right  
: Points in a Work window area or Store window area can be de-  
leted by clicking them in the reverse order in which they were set.  
Blue  
9i  
1
2
4
3
5
6
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Click the [Store] button.  
13  
• This step is not necessary if the [Auto Store]  
The data displayed in the Work window area  
checkbox has been checked.  
will appear in the Store window area. If the  
corresponding points have been properly des-  
ignated, all the stored data will be displayed  
in 3-D in the element view window after it is  
registrated and three-dimensionalized.  
Chapter  
2
Repeat Steps 10 to 13 until the desired  
corresponding points are designated.  
14  
15  
File  
Menu  
Click the [OK] button.  
The data displayed in the element view win-  
dow by the Store function will remain as is.  
• If [Save Raw Data] checkbox in [File-Import  
-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box has been  
checked, [Save As] dialog box will be displayed.  
The data comprised of multiple shots will be  
saved together with the registration conversion  
parameters as a single piece of data (CDK).  
qEnter the desired file name.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
1
2
9i  
• Clicking the [Cancel] button will delete the ele-  
ments that were displayed in the store window  
when the [Store] button is clicked at the end of  
execution of this command.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] Dialog Box  
Executes auto-focus.  
AF  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 9i is connected.  
Checking this checkbox enables distance setting.  
Distance  
Intensity  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 9i is connected.  
Checking this checkbox enables LD and Gain setting.  
• LD:  
• Gain:  
Note  
Sets the laser power.  
Sets the gain. The gain cannot be set if the “Standard” scan mode has been selected.  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 9i is connected.  
Chapter  
2
Performs a scan.  
Scan  
File  
Note  
Menu  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 9i is connected.  
Imports the stored data (CDK) that was scanned by the VIVID 9i.  
If data containing coordinate conversion parameters is imported, it will be stored automatically  
even though it contains multiple scan data. In the case of data that has been stored, only the first  
scan data will be imported.  
Import CDK  
Takes a color shot. Clicking this button at the end of scan will take a color shot again and display  
the updated color image.  
Color Read  
Note  
This button is effective if the [Use Color] checkbox is checked.  
Clicking this button enables you to delete the area that is not necessary for threedimensionalization  
Edit  
by specifying it in the Work window using the mouse.  
If this checkbox is checked, data save will be performed automatically when corresponding points  
are designated in the Work and Store window areas.  
Auto Store  
Store  
Registers the data present in the Work window area as store data, puts it into three-dimensional  
form and displays it in the element view window.  
Switches display mode for the data currently displayed in the Work window area.  
• Mono: The current image is displayed in monochrome. This parameter is effective only when  
VIVID 9i is connected.  
Mono/Color/Pitch  
• Color: The color data acquired from the scan is displayed.  
• Pitch: The color display is done in accordance with the distance data from Near to Far.  
Rotates the rotary stage to the desired angle using the slide bar.  
Angle  
This item is displayed when the rotary stage has been initialized successfully.  
Switches from one stored data to another.  
[Prev] button: Displays the previous data.  
[Next] button: Displays the next data.  
Prev/Next  
Deletes the stored data currently displayed in the Work or Store window area. The corresponding  
elements in the element view window are also deleted at the same time.  
Delete  
View  
OK  
9i  
Displays/hides the data currently displayed in the Store window area into the element view win-  
dow.  
Keeps the element data created during command execution and exits the File-Import-Digitizer-  
One Scan command.  
Note  
If the [Save Raw Data] checkbox is checked, the data save dialog box is displayed.  
Exits the File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan command.  
Cancel  
The element data created during command execution will be deleted.  
Displays the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialogbox.  
Option  
Executes the Calibration command and calibrates the VIVID 9i.  
Calibration  
Note  
Have the Field Calibration System ready.  
39  
For details on user calibration, refer to VIVID 9i Instruction Manual.  
Ref.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] Dialog Box  
Scan Parameter  
Mode  
Standard:The Filter settings are fixed to H.Q. & N.F.  
The settable distance range is from 600 to 1,000 mm.  
The Gain value is fixed at 0.  
• Extend: The Filter settings are fixed to Noise Filter (N.F.).  
The settable distance range is from 500 to 2,500 mm.  
• User:  
The Filter settings can be user-defined.  
The settable distance range is from 500 to 2,500 mm.  
Digitizer’s Parameter  
Number of Scans  
GET  
:
Loads the setting parameters from VIVID 9i and uses them as parameters for this  
command.  
Saves the parameters set by this command to VIVID 9i as the setting parameters.  
SET  
:
Chapter  
2
Sets the number of shots to expand the dynamic range.  
Increasing the number of shots reduces data loss.  
File  
Menu  
Checking this checkbox enables you to set the brightness of the image.  
Checking this checkbox takes a color shot when a scan is made.  
Brightness  
Use Color  
Log  
Performs log correction for the color data if this checkbox is checked. This correction is used to  
make neutral colors brighter.  
Performs dark correction for the color data if this checkbox is checked. This correction is used  
when lines are noticeable in the color image.  
Dark  
Convert Parameter  
Save Raw Data  
Checking this checkbox displays the data save dialog at the end of the File-Import-Digitizer-  
One Scan command, allowing you to save the data.  
Used to select the number of data points to be read from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16” and “Adaptive”.  
Reduction Rate  
Filter  
• None:  
Performs no correction for points when reading data. This can be set for  
User mode only.  
• Noise Filter(N.F.): Reduces noise in points when reading data.  
• High Quarity(H.Q.): Deletes low-reliable data when reading data.  
• H.Q. & N.F.:  
Reduces noise in points and deletes low-reliable data when reading data.  
Note  
In the case of low-reliable data, areas with excessively high laser power are displayed in light gray, and  
those with excessively low laser power are displayed in dark gray.  
If “ON” is selected, points are generated in the holes that were produced as a loss of data so that  
the holes are filled.  
Fill Holes  
Remove  
Select the data to be deleted when reading data.  
• None:  
Outputs the data without performing specific processing.  
• Boundary (B.):  
Outputs the data after deleting boundary points.  
• 5deg & B./10dwg & B./15deg. & B./20deg & B.:  
Outputs the data after deleting the points present inside and at the bound-  
ary of the polygons that are angled within approximately 5, 10, 15 and 20  
9i  
degrees to the vector of the line of view.  
Select the Port and Model to be used and click on the [Apply] button. The rotary stage will be  
initialized. If initialization is successful, the rotary stage can be controlled by using the Angle  
slide bar in the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] dialog box.  
Stage Parameter  
Restores the default parameter settings.  
Default  
OK  
Closes the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box.  
The settings will be set.  
Closes the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box.  
Cancel  
The settings will be cancelled.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 9i  
This command is used to cause the VIVID 9i to make multiple shots of the object by controlling the rotary  
stage remotely from this software. Registration of multiple scan data can be performed using the Calibration  
Chart for extract center of rotation.  
Once registration is complete, the data can be saved together with the coordinate conversion parameters pr  
vided for registration as a single data file (CDK). The data is then registrated and three-dimensionalized based  
upon the saved coordinate conversion parameters using the File-Import commands.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
• The calibration chart is an accessory of the rotating stage set.  
• Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Ref.  
For details of the File-Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
n When Using Only the Rotating Stage  
Operating Procedure  
When using VIVID 9i for the first time  
or when the lens has been exchanged,  
1
Note  
field calibration must be performed us-  
ing a Field Calibration System.  
User calibration must also be performed when using  
VIVID 9i after long periods of non-use or when exces-  
sive changes in the environment (temperature, humid-  
ity) have occurred.  
Place a Field Calibration System that is suitable  
for the lens to be used, and click the [Calibration]  
button in the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan]  
dialog box to start field calibration.  
Ref.  
For details on user calibration, refer to VIVID 9i  
Instruction Manual.  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
[Digitizer] and then [Step Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
• ThemonochromemonitorimagecapturedbytheVIVID  
9i will appear in the Work window area of the dialog box.  
• IftheModelfoldercontainstheChartdatathatisconsid-  
ered to be appropriate, it will be imported automatically.  
2
9i  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Place the object on the rotating stage.  
3
4
To display the object in the middle of the  
Work window area, change the position  
of the object or move the VIVID 9i back  
and forth to change the view angle.  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the VIVID 9i. If  
the lenses are changed, carry out field calibration using  
the Field Calibration System.  
Click the [Option] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option]  
dialog box will appear.  
Chapter  
2
5
File  
Menu  
Memo  
• If rotary stage has already been used and if changing  
settings is not required, initialization of the rotary stage  
can be performed by clicking on the [Stage Apply] but-  
ton in the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog box.  
In this case, proceed to Step 9.  
9i  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Set optional parameters.  
6
7
Item  
Explanation  
Scan Parameter  
Convert Parameter  
Sets the settings for scanning.  
Sets the settings for three-  
dimensionalization.  
Stage Parameter  
Select the rotary stage to be  
used.  
[Default] button  
Clicking this restores the  
default settings.  
Ref.  
For details, refer to the parameters (P.49) for [File-  
Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Apply] button to check  
whether the rotary stage has been ini-  
tialized successfully.  
If the rotary stage has been initialized success-  
fully, the [Scan] button will be effective.  
• If initialization is not successful, turn off the  
power to the rotary stage power, turn it on again,  
and then click the [Apply] button.  
• If the rotary stage has already been used and if there  
is no need to change the settings, initialization of the  
rotary stage can be performed by clicking on the [Stage  
Apply] button in the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan]  
dialog box instead of the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step  
Scan-Option] dialog box.  
• Select “Free” for [Rotation Step] in [Stage Param-  
eter] field, and click [Apply]. If the stage has been  
recognized properly, a stage slide bar and [Chart  
Scan] button will be displayed at the bottom of  
the work window when the [File-Import-Digi-  
tizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box is closed.  
After necessary settings are made,  
click the [OK] button.  
8
9i  
The settings will be set and the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box will  
close.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Place the Calibration Chart on the ro-  
tating stage and scan the Calibration  
Chart.  
9
Calibration chart S  
Position the chart with the black line facing  
the VIVID, and place it on the rotating stage so  
that both entire side surfaces are observed in  
the viewfinder.  
• This step is not necessary if the Calibration Chart  
data has already been imported when this dialog  
box is opened.  
Memo  
If it is not possible to perform calibration using calibra-  
tion chart S, use calibration chart M.  
• To acquire data from the object first then acquire  
the calibration chart data, perform steps 9 and 10  
after completing step 15. In this case, select cur-  
rent chart angle from [Current Angle] and click  
[Scan] button, or click [Chart Scan] button to  
acquire chart data.  
Chapter  
2
• Steps 9 and 10 are not necessary when importing  
existing the Calibration Chart data (i.e. data that  
has coordinate parameters). Clicking the [Import  
CDK] button will open the file read dialog box.  
File  
Menu  
The Calibration Chart data (chart****.cdk) that  
has been saved can be imported.  
qSelect the file to be imported.  
• The [Chart Scan] button appears when “Free”  
is selected for [Rotation Step] in [File-Import-  
Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box.  
wClick on the [Open] button.  
1
2
Click the [Scan] button.  
10  
The Calibration Chart will be scanned.  
When the data is recognized as Calibration  
Chart data successfully:  
qThe Calibration Chart data will be stored under  
the file name of chart****.cdk (“****” are the  
last four digits of the main unit’s serial num-  
ber) in the Model folder.  
• An error message will be displayed if the data is  
not recognized as the Calibration Chart data suc-  
cessfully.  
9i  
• When “Free” has been selected using the [Rota-  
tion Step] of the [Stage Parameter], please use the  
[Chart Scan] button instead of the [Scan] button.  
wThe data acquired from the subsequent scans  
will be coordinate-converted around the rota-  
tional axis.  
Good example  
Bad example  
eThe [AutoScan] checkbox will be displayed.  
Note  
Make sure that the acquired range image looks like  
the good example given below. If it resembles the bad  
example, click the [Scan] button again to re-scan the  
calibration chart.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Click the [Scan] button to acquire the  
first scan data.  
A scan will start, and a color image will be  
11  
Memo  
If [Use Color] is not checked (i.e. no check mark is  
shown), The scan data has no color image data, and a gray-  
scale image will be displayed instead of a color image.  
displayed in the Work window area.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• If the [Auto Scan] checkbox is checked, the  
second and subsequent scans will be carried out  
automatically.  
• Clicking on the following radio buttons will make  
a change to the image displayed in the Work win-  
dow area. The data acquired during the scan will  
remain unchanged.  
• If the [Auto Store] checkbox is checked, a store  
will be carried out automatically at the end of  
scan.  
Item  
Explanation  
[Mono] radio  
button  
The current image is displayed in  
monochrome.  
[Color] radio  
button  
The color image acquired from  
the scan is displayed.  
[Pitch] radio  
button  
The distance data is displayed  
in the color that is shown in the  
Near-Far color slide bar ac-  
cording to the distance from the  
object to the digitizer.  
• Clicking the [Color Read] button will re-scan for  
the color data only. The distance data will not be  
updated.  
• Clicking the [Edit] button enables you to delete  
the area that is not necessary for three-dimen-  
sionalization by specifying it using the mouse.  
Messages will appear at the bottom of the Work  
window area as shown right, so follow them to  
operate the mouse.  
Click the [Edit] button again to exit the edit mode.  
9i  
• Switch to pitch display screen, and right-click on  
desired position in the screen while holding down  
[CTRL] key. The Z-axis coordinates at that posi-  
tion (distance from VIVID 9i) will appear.  
To specify distance manually and perform mea-  
surement, this value must be used.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Click on the [Store] button.  
The color data displayed in the Work window  
area will appear in the Store window area.  
12  
Note  
The [Store] button will be disabled (displayed in gray)  
when clicked once. This will prevent the same work  
window area’s data from being stored repeatedly.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• By clicking the [Store] button, each shot data  
other than the Calibration Chart data will be  
coordinate-converted around the rotational axis  
and displayed three-dimensionally in the element  
view window. If a setting other than “Free” is  
selected for [Rotation Step], the rotary stage will  
rotate at specified angles automatically. The angle  
shown in [Current Angle] will automatically be  
updated at the same time.  
• This step is not necessary if the [Auto Store]  
checkbox has been checked.  
Click the [Scan] button to acquire the  
second data.  
13  
14  
Note  
If “Free” is selected for [Rotation Step] in the [File-Im-  
port-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box, the rotary  
stage must be rotated to the desired angle using the slide  
bar in advance.  
9i  
Click the [Store] button.  
• This step is not necessary if the [Auto Store]  
The data displayed in the Work window area  
will appear in the Store window area. If the  
corresponding points have been properly des-  
ignated, all the stored data will be displayed  
in 3-D in the element view window after it is  
registrated and three-dimensionalized.  
checkbox has been checked.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Repeat Steps 13 to 14 until the desired  
corresponding points are designated.  
15  
16  
Click the [OK] button.  
The data displayed in the element view win-  
dow by the Store function will remain as is.  
• If [Save Raw Data] checkbox in [File-Import  
-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box has been  
checked, [Save As] dialog box will be displayed.  
The data comprised of multiple shots will be  
saved together with the registration conversion  
parameters as a single piece of data (CDK).  
Chapter  
2
qEnter the desired file name.  
File  
Menu  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
1
2
• Clicking on the [Cancel] button will delete the  
elements that were displayed in the Store window  
area when the [Store] button is clicked at the end  
of execution of this command.  
9i  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] Dialog Box  
Executes auto-focus.  
AF  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 9i is connected.  
Checking this checkbox enables distance setting.  
Checking this checkbox enables LD and Gain setting.  
Distance  
Intensity  
• LD:  
Sets the laser power.  
• Gain:  
Sets the gain. The gain cannot be set if the “Standard” scan mode has been selected.  
Auto Scan  
Scan  
Checking this checkbox causes scan, store and stage control operations to be automatically   
performed sequentially.  
Performs a scan.  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 9i is connected.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Imports the stored data (CDK) that was scanned by the VIVID 9i.  
Import CDK  
Color Read  
Takes a color shot. Clicking this button at the end of scan will take a color shot again and display  
the updated color image.  
Note  
This button is effective if the [Use Color] checkbox is checked.  
Clicking this checkbox enables you to delete the area that is not necessary for threedimensionaliza-  
tion by specifying it in the work window using the mouse.  
Edit  
Checking this checkbox performs store operation automatically at the end of scan operation.  
Auto Store  
Store  
Registers the data p resent in the Work window area as store data, puts it into three-dimensional  
form and displays it in the element view window.  
Switches display mode for the data currently displayed in the Work window area.  
Mono/Color/Pitch  
• Mono: The current image is displayed in monochrome. This parameter is effective only when  
VIVID 9i is connected.  
• Color: The color data acquired from the scan is displayed.  
• Pitch: The color display is done in accordance with the distance data from Near to Far.  
The current step angle is displayed. Normally, the angle is updated when a store operation is car-  
ried out, so additional operations are not necessary. When the step angle has been changed to the  
desired angle manually, data scan can be performed at the new step angles.  
Current Angle  
Memo  
This item is not displayed if “Free” is selected for [Rotation Step].  
Rotates the rotary stage to the desired angle using the slide bar.  
Angle  
This item is displayed when the rotary stage has been initialized successfully.  
Used to scan the Calibration Chart data.  
Chart Scan  
Memo  
This item is displayed if “Free” is selected for [Rotation Step].  
Initializes the rotary stage.  
Stage Apply  
Prev/Next  
Switches from one stored data to another.  
[Prev] button: Displays the previous data.  
[Next] button: Displays the next data.  
Deletes the stored data currently displayed in the Work or Store window area. The corresponding  
Delete  
elements in the element view window are also deleted at the same time.  
9i  
Displays/hides the data currently displayed in the Store window area into the element view window.  
View  
OK  
Keeps the element data created during command execution and exits the File-Import-Digitizer-  
One Scan command.  
Note  
If the [Save Raw Data] checkbox is checked, the data save dialog box is displayed.  
Exits the File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan command.  
Cancel  
The element data created during command execution will be deleted.  
Displays the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialogbox.  
Option  
Executes the Calibration command and calibrates the VIVID 9i.  
Calibration  
Note  
Have the Field Calibration System ready.  
For details on user calibration, refer to VIVID 9i Instruction Manual.  
Ref.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] Dialog Box  
Scan Parameter  
Mode  
• Standard: The Filter settings are fixed to H.Q. & N.F.  
The settable distance range is from 600 to 1,000 mm.  
The Gain value is fixed at 0.  
• Extend:  
• User:  
The Filter settings are fixed to Noise Filter (N.F.).  
The settable distance range is from 500 to 2,500 mm.  
The Filter settings can be user-defined.  
The settable distance range is from 500 to 2,500 mm.  
Digitizer’s Parameter  
Number of Scans  
GET  
:
Loads the setting parameters from VIVID 9i and uses them as parameters for this  
command.  
Saves the parameters set by this command to VIVID 9i as the setting parameters.  
SET  
:
Chapter  
2
Sets the number of shots to expand the dynamic range.  
Increasing the number of shots reduces data loss.  
File  
Menu  
Checking this checkbox enables you to set the brightness of the image.  
Checking this checkbox takes a color shot when a scan is made.  
Brightness  
Use Color  
Log  
Performs log correction for the color data if this checkbox is checked. This correction is used to  
make neutral colors brighter.  
Performs dark correction for the color data if this checkbox is checked. This correction is used  
when lines are noticeable in the color image.  
Dark  
Convert Parameter  
Save Raw Data  
Checking this checkbox displays the data save dialog at the end of the File-Import-Digitizer-  
Step Scan command, allowing you to save the data.  
Used to select the number of data points to be read from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16” and “Adaptive”.  
Reduction Rate  
Filter  
• None:  
Performs no correction for points when reading data. This can be set for  
User mode only.  
• Noise Filter (N.F.): Reduces noise in points when reading data.  
• High Quarity (H.Q.): Deletes low-reliable data when reading data.  
• H.Q. & N.F.:  
Reduces noise in points and deletes low-reliable data when reading data.  
Note  
In the case of low-reliable data, areas with excessively high laser power are displayed in light gray, and  
those with excessively low laser power are displayed in dark gray.  
If “ON” is selected, points are generated in the holes that were produced as a loss of data so that  
the holes are filled.  
Fill Holes  
Remove  
Select the data to be deleted when reading data.  
• None:  
Outputs the data without performing specific processing.  
• Boundary(B.): Outputs the data after deleting boundary points.  
• 5deg & B./10dwg & B./15deg. & B./20deg & B.:  
Outputs the data after deleting the points present inside and at the boundary of  
the polygons that are angled within approximately 5, 10, 15 and 20 degrees to the  
vector of the line of view.  
9i  
Select the Port and Model to be used and click on the [Apply] button. The rotary stage will be  
initialized. If initialization is successful, the rotary stage can be controlled in the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog box.  
Stage Parameter  
Select rotating angle for each step of rotary stage.  
Restores the default parameter settings.  
Rotation Step  
Default  
OK  
Closes the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box.  
The settings will be set.  
Cancel  
Closes the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box.  
The settings will be cancelled.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 910  
This command is used to cause the VIVID 910 (VI-910) to scan the object one scan at a time using the remote  
control function of this software. Registration of multiple scan data can be performed by manually designating  
their corresponding points.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Memo  
Chapter  
2
Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
File  
Menu  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
1
[Digitizer] and then [One Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
• The monochrome monitor image captured by the  
VIVID 910 will appear in the Work window area  
of the dialog box.  
Set an object in place.  
If you are going to use the rotating stage,  
place the object on it.  
910  
2
To display the object in the middle of the  
3
Work window area , change the posi-  
tion of the object or move the instrument  
back and forth to change the view angle.  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the VIVID.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Click the [Option] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option]  
dialog box will appear.  
4
5
Set optional parameters.  
Item  
Explanation  
Scan Parameter  
Convert Parameter  
Sets the settings for scanning.  
Sets the settings for three-  
dimensionalization.  
Chapter  
2
Stage Parameter  
Select the rotary stage to be  
used.  
File  
Menu  
[Default] button  
Clicking this restores the  
default settings.  
Ref.  
For details, refer to parameters (P.57) for [File-Im-  
port-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box.  
• Select the desired stage in [Stage Parameter]  
field, and click on the [Apply] button. If the stage  
has been recognized properly, a stage slide bar  
will be displayed at the bottom of the work win-  
dow when the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-  
Option] dialog box is closed.  
• If initialization is not successful, turn off the  
power to the rotary stage power, turn it on again,  
and then click on the [Apply] button.  
After necessary settings are made,  
click on the [OK] button.  
6
The settings will be set and the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box will  
close.  
910  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Click on the [Scan] button to acquire  
the first scan data.  
A scan will start, and a color image will be  
7
Memo  
If [Use Color] is not checked (i.e. no check mark is  
shown), the scan data has no color image data, and a gray-  
scale image will be displayed instead of a color image.  
displayed in the Work window area.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• Clicking on the following radio buttons will  
make a change to the image displayed in the work  
window. The data acquired during the scan will  
remain unchanged.  
Item  
Explanation  
[Mono] radio  
button  
The current image is displayed in  
monochrome.  
[Color] radio  
button  
The color image acquired from  
the scan is displayed.  
[Pitch] radio  
button  
The distance data is displayed  
in the color that is shown in the  
Near-Far color slide bar ac-  
cording to the distance from the  
object to the digitizer.  
• Clicking the [Color Read] button will re-scan for  
the color data only. The distance data will not be  
updated.  
• Clicking the [Edit] button enables you to delete  
the area that is not necessary for three-dimen-  
sionalization by specifying it using the mouse.  
Messages will appear at the bottom of the Work  
window area as shown right, so follow them to  
operate the mouse.  
Check the [Edit] button again to exit the edit mode.  
910  
• Switch to pitch display screen, and right-click on  
desired position in the screen while holding down  
[CTRL] key. The Z-axis coordinates at that posi-  
tion (distance from VIVID 9i) will appear.  
To specify distance manually and perform mea-  
surement, this value must be used.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Click on the [Store] button.  
The color data displayed in the Work window  
area will appear in the Store window area.  
Note  
8
The [Store] button will be disabled (displayed in gray)  
when clicked once. This will prevent the same Work  
window area’s data from being stored repeatedly.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Acquire the second scan data. Move  
the object so that 3 pairs of corre-  
sponding points or 1 or more pairs of  
corresponding points can be set be-  
tween the first scan data and the sec-  
ond and subsequent scan data.  
9
First Scan Data  
910  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Click on the [Scan] button.  
At this time, the data in the Work window area  
does not correspond to the one in the Store  
window area, so a red frame is displayed.  
10  
RED  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Designate three or more corresponding  
points. Set the corresponding points in  
the work window and then store win-  
dow alternately. When the correspond-  
ing points have been designated prop-  
erly, the red frame will turn to blue.  
11  
Memo  
Registration with 1 pair of corresponding points must be  
used for objects with characteristic shape.  
Since registration may not be performed successfully for  
objects with non-characteristic shape (e.g. flat planes, cy-  
lindrical surfaces), using 3 pairs of corresponding points  
is recommended  
If desired points are set by left-clicking them,  
registration will be performed each time 3 or  
more pairs of corresponding points are set.  
By using middle button or left button + [Shift]  
button, registration can be performed when 1  
or more pairs of corresponding points are set.  
• Each time corresponding points are designated,  
registration among data is performed.  
• If the [Auto Store] checkbox has been checked,  
proceed to Step 12 after the corresponding points  
are designated properly.  
Left  
: Sets a point.  
(Registration is performed using 3 or more pairs of corresponding points)  
Middle  
: Sets a point.  
([Shift] + Left) (Registration is performed using 1 or more pairs of corresponding points)  
Right  
: Points in a Work window area or Store window area can be de-  
leted by clicking them in the reverse order in which they were set.  
Blue  
2
1
910  
4
3
6
5
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Click on the [Store] button.  
12  
• This step is not necessary if the [Auto Store]  
The data displayed in the Work window area  
will appear in the Store window area. If the  
corresponding points have been properly des-  
ignated, all the stored data will be displayed  
in 3-D in the element view window after it is  
registrated and three-dimensionalized.  
checkbox has been checked.  
Chapter  
2
Repeat Steps 9 to 12 until the desired  
corresponding points are designated.  
13  
14  
File  
Menu  
Click the [OK] button.  
The data displayed in the element view win-  
dow by the Store function will remain as is.  
• If [Save Raw Data] checkbox in [File-Import  
-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box has been  
checked, [Save As] dialog box will be displayed.  
The data will be saved as a CDM file.  
qEnter the desired file name.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
1
2
910  
• Clicking on the [Cancel] button will delete the  
elements that were displayed in the store window  
when the [Store] button is clicked at the end of  
execution of this command.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] Dialog Box  
Executes auto-focus.  
AF  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 910 is connected.  
Checking this checkbox enables distance setting.  
Distance  
Intensity  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 910 is connected.  
Checking this checkbox enables LD and Gain setting.  
• LD :  
Sets the laser power.  
• Gain : Sets the gain.  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 910 is connected.  
Chapter  
2
Performs a scan.  
Scan  
File  
Menu  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 910 is connected.  
Import the saved CDM data.  
Import CDM  
Color Read  
Takes a color shot. Clicking this button at the end of scan will take a color shot again and display  
the updated color image.  
Note  
This button is effective if the [Use Color] checkbox is checked.  
Clicking this checkbox enables you to delete the area that is not necessary for threedimensionaliza-  
Edit  
tion by specifying it in the Work window area using the mouse.  
If this checkbox is checked, data save will be performed automatically when corresponding points  
are designated in the Work and Store window areas.  
Auto Store  
Store  
Registers the data present in the Work window area as store data, puts it into three-dimensional  
form and displays it in the element view window.  
Switches display mode for the data currently displayed in the Work window area.  
• Mono : The current image is displayed in monochrome. This parameter is effective only when  
VIVID 9i is connected.  
Mono/Color/Pitch  
• Color : The color data acquired from the scan is displayed.  
• Pitch : The color display is done in accordance with the distance data from Near to Far.  
Rotates the rotary stage to the desired angle using the slide bar.  
Angle  
This item is displayed when the rotary stage has been initialized successfully.  
Switches from one stored data to another.  
[Prev] button : Displays the previous data.  
[Next] button : Displays the next data.  
Prev/Next  
Deletes the stored data currently displayed in the Work or Store window area. The corresponding  
Delete  
elements in the element view window are also deleted at the same time.  
Displays/hides the data currently displayed in the Store window area into the element view window.  
View  
OK  
Keeps the element data created during command execution and exits the File-Import-Digitizer-  
One Scan command.  
910  
Note  
If the [Save Raw Data] checkbox is checked, the data save dialog box is displayed.  
Exits the File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan command.  
The element data created during command execution will be deleted.  
Cancel  
Option  
Displays the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialogbox.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] Dialog Box  
Scan Parameter  
Mode  
Select the scanning mode : FINE or FAST  
Scan Parameter  
Load  
Save  
:
:
Loads the setting parameters and uses them as parameters for this command.  
Saves the parameters set by this command as the setting parameters.  
Checking this checkbox enables you to set the brightness of the image.  
Checking this checkbox takes a color shot when a scan is made.  
Brightness  
Use Color  
Log  
Performs log correction for the color data if this checkbox is checked. This correction is used to  
make neutral colors brighter.  
Performs dark correction for the color data if this checkbox is checked. This correction is used  
when lines are noticeable in the color image.  
Dark  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Convert Parameter  
Save Raw Data  
Checking this checkbox displays the data save dialog at the end of the File-Import-Digitizer-  
One Scan command, allowing you to save the data.  
Used to select the number of data points to be read from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16” and “No Poly-  
gon”.  
Reduction Rate  
Filter  
• None :  
Performs no correction for points when reading data.  
• Noise Filter(N.F.) : Reduces noise in points when reading data.  
• High Quarity(H.Q.) : Deletes low-reliable data when reading data.  
• H.Q. & N.F. :  
Reduces noise in points and deletes low-reliable data when reading data.  
If “ON” is selected, points are generated in the holes that were produced as a loss of data so that  
the holes are filled.  
Fill Holes  
Remove  
Select the data to be deleted when reading data.  
• None :  
Outputs the data without performing specific processing.  
• Boundary (B.) :  
Outputs the data after deleting boundary points.  
• 5deg & B./10dwg & B./15deg. & B./20deg & B. :  
Outputs the data after deleting the points present inside and at the bound-  
ary of the polygons that are angled within approximately 5, 10, 15 and 20  
degrees to the vector of the line of view.  
Hardware Parameter  
Stage Parameter  
• Vertical :  
• Horizontal :  
Check this checkbox if using the VIVID unit in vertical orientation.  
Check this checkbox if using the VIVID unit in horizontal orientation.  
Select the Port and Model to be used and click on the [Apply] button. The rotary stage will be  
initialized. If initialization is successful, the rotary stage can be controlled by using the Angle  
slide bar in the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] dialog box.  
Restores the default parameter settings.  
Default  
OK  
Closes the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box.  
The settings will be set.  
Closes the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Option] dialog box.  
Cancel  
910  
The settings will be cancelled.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 910  
This command is used to cause the VIVID 910 (VI-910) to make multiple shots of the object by controlling  
the rotary stage remotely from this software. Registration of multiple scan data can be performed using the Calibra-  
tion Chart for extract center of rotation.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Memo  
Chapter  
2
• The calibration chart is an accessory of the rotating  
stage set.  
File  
Menu  
• Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Ref.  
For details, refer to parameters (P.144) for [File-  
Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box.  
n When Using Only the Rotating Stage  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
1
[Digitizer] and then [Step Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
• The monochrome monitor image captured by the  
VIVID 910 will appear in the Work window area  
of the dialog box.  
• If the Model folder contains the Chart data that is  
considered to be appropriate, it will be imported  
automatically.  
910  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Place the object on the rotating stage.  
2
3
To display the object in the middle of the  
Work window area, change the position  
of the object or move the VIVID 9i back  
and forth to change the view angle.  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the VIVID 910.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Option] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option]  
dialog box will appear.  
4
Memo  
• If rotary stage has already been used and if changing  
settings is not required, initialization of the rotary stage  
can be performed by clicking on the [Stage Apply] but-  
ton in the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog box.  
In this case, proceed to Step 8  
910  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Set optional parameters.  
5
Item  
Explanation  
Scan Parameter  
Convert Parameter  
Sets the settings for scanning.  
Sets the settings for three-  
dimensionalization.  
Stage Parameter  
Select the rotary stage to be  
used.  
[Default] button  
Clicking this restores the  
default settings.  
Ref.  
For details, refer to the parameters (P.66) for [File-  
Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Apply] button to check  
whether the rotary stage has been ini-  
tialized successfully.  
6
If the rotary stage has been initialized success-  
fully, the [Scan] button will be effective.  
• If initialization is not successful, turn off the  
power to the rotary stage power, turn it on again,  
and then click on the [Apply] button.  
• If the rotary stage has already been used and if there  
is no need to change the settings, initialization of the  
rotary stage can be performed by clicking on the [Stage  
Apply] button in the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan]  
dialog box instead of the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step  
Scan-Option] dialog box.  
• Select “Free” for [Rotation Step] in [Stage Param-  
eter] field, and click [Apply]. If the stage has been  
recognized properly, a stage slide bar and [Chart  
Scan] button will be displayed at the bottom of  
the work window when the [File-Import-Digitizer-  
Step Scan-Option] dialog box is closed.  
After necessary settings are made,  
click the [OK] button.  
7
910  
The settings will be set and the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box will  
close.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Place the Calibration Chart on the ro-  
tating stage and scan the Calibration  
Chart.  
8
Calibration chart S  
Position the chart with the black line facing  
the VIVID, and place it on the rotating stage so  
that both entire side surfaces are observed in  
the viewfinder.  
• This step is not necessary if the Calibration Chart  
data has already been imported when this dialog  
box is opened.  
Memo  
If it is not possible to perform calibration using calibra-  
tion chart S, use calibration chart M.  
• To acquire data from the object first then acquire  
the calibration chart data, perform steps 8 and 9  
after completing step 14. In this case, select cur-  
rent chart angle from [Current Angle] and click  
[Scan] button, or click [Chart Scan] button to  
acquire chart data.  
• Steps 9 and 10 are not necessary when importing  
existing the Calibration Chart data (i.e. data that  
has coordinate parameters). Clicking on the [Im-  
port CDM] button will open the file read dialog  
box.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
The Calibration Chart data (chart****.cdm) that  
has been saved can be imported.  
• The [Chart Scan] button appears when “Free”  
is selected for [Rotation Step] in [File-Import-  
Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box.  
qSelect the file to be imported.  
wClick on the [Open] button.  
Note  
After changing the setting orientation at Convert Pa-  
rameter – Hardware Parameter on the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box, the chart data  
must be acquired again before measuring.  
1
2
Click the [Scan] button.  
9
The Calibration Chart will be scanned.  
When the data is recognized as Calibration  
Chart data successfully:  
qThe Calibration Chart data will be stored under  
the file name of chart****.cdm (“****” are the  
last four digits of the main unit’s serial num-  
ber) in the Model folder.  
• An error message will be displayed if the data is  
not recognized as the Calibration Chart data suc-  
cessfully.  
910  
• When “Free” has been selected using the [Rota-  
tion Step] of the [Stage Parameter], please use the  
[Chart Scan] button instead of the [Scan] button.  
wThe data acquired from the subsequent scans  
will be coordinate-converted around the rota-  
tional axis.  
Good example  
Bad example  
eThe [AutoScan] checkbox will be displayed.  
Note  
Make sure that the acquired range image looks like  
the good example given below. If it resembles the bad  
example, click the [Scan] button again to re-scan the  
calibration chart.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Click the [Scan] button to acquire the  
first scan data.  
A scan will start, and a color image will be  
displayed in the Work window area.  
Memo  
10  
If [Use Color] is not checked (i.e. no check mark is  
shown), the scan data has no color image data, and a gray-  
scale image will be displayed instead of a color image.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• If the [Auto Scan] checkbox is checked, the  
second and subsequent scans will be carried out  
automatically.  
• Clicking on the following radio buttons will  
make a change to the image displayed in the work  
window. The data acquired during the scan will  
remain unchanged.  
• If the [Auto Store] checkbox is checked, a store  
will be carried out automatically at the end of  
scan.  
Item  
Explanation  
[Mono] radio  
button  
The current image is displayed in  
monochrome.  
[Color] radio  
button  
The color image acquired from  
the scan is displayed.  
[Pitch] radio  
button  
The distance data is displayed  
in the color that is shown in the  
Near-Far color slide bar ac-  
cording to the distance from the  
object to the digitizer.  
• Clicking the [Color Read] button will re-scan for  
the color data only. The distance data will not be  
updated.  
• Clicking the [Edit] button enables you to delete  
the area that is not necessary for three-dimen-  
sionalization by specifying it using the mouse.  
Messages will appear at the bottom of the Work  
window area as shown right, so follow them to  
operate the mouse.  
Click the [Edit] button again to exit the edit mode.  
• Switch to pitch display screen, and right-click on  
desired position in the screen while holding down  
[CTRL] key. The Z-axis coordinates at that posi-  
tion (distance from VIVID 910) will appear.  
To specify distance manually and perform mea-  
surement, this value must be used.  
910  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Click on the [Store] button.  
The color data displayed in the Work window  
area will appear in the Store window area.  
11  
Note  
The [Store] button will be disabled (displayed in gray)  
when clicked once. This will prevent the same Work  
window area’s data from being stored repeatedly.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• By clicking on the [Store] button, each shot data  
other than the Calibration Chart data will be  
coordinate-converted around the rotational axis  
and displayed three-dimensionally in the element  
view window. If a setting other than “Free” is  
selected for [Rotation Step], the rotary stage will  
rotate at specified angles automatically. The angle  
shown in [Current Angle] will automatically be  
updated at the same time.  
• This step is not necessary if the [Auto Store]  
checkbox has been checked.  
Click on the [Scan] button to acquire  
the second data.  
12  
13  
Note  
If “Free” is selected for [Rotation Step] in the [File-Im-  
port-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box, the rotary  
stage must be rotated to the desired angle using the slide  
bar in advance.  
910  
Click on the [Store] button.  
• This step is not necessary if the [Auto Store]  
The data displayed in the Work window area  
will appear in the Store window area. If the  
corresponding points have been properly des-  
ignated, all the stored data will be displayed  
in 3-D in the element view window after it is  
registrated and three-dimensionalized.  
checkbox has been checked.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Repeat Steps 12 to 13 until the desired  
corresponding points are designated.  
14  
15  
Click the [OK] button.  
The data displayed in the element view win-  
dow by the Store function will remain as is.  
• If [Save Raw Data] checkbox in [File-Import  
-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box has been  
checked, [Save As] dialog box will be displayed.  
The data will be saved as a CDM file.  
qEnter the desired file name.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Chapter  
2
Note  
File  
Menu  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
1
2
• Clicking on the [Cancel] button will delete the  
elements that were displayed in the store window  
when the [Store] button is clicked at the end of  
execution of this command.  
910  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] Dialog Box  
Executes auto-focus.  
AF  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 910 is connected.  
Checking this checkbox enables distance setting.  
Distance  
Intensity  
Checking this checkbox enables LD and Gain setting.  
• LD:  
• Gain:  
Sets the laser power.  
Sets the gain.  
Auto Scan  
Scan  
Checking this checkbox causes scan, store and stage control operations to be automatically   
performed sequentially.  
Performs a scan.  
Note  
This parameter is effective only when VIVID 910 is connected.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Import the saved CDM data.  
Import CDK  
Color Read  
Takes a color shot. Clicking this button at the end of scan will take a color shot again and display  
the updated color image.  
Note  
This button is effective if the [Use Color] checkbox is checked.  
Clicking this button enables you to delete the area that is not necessary for three-dimensionalization by  
Edit  
specifying it in the Work window area using the mouse.  
Checking this checkbox performs store operation automatically at the end of scan operation.  
Auto Store  
Store  
Registers the data p resent in the Work window area as store data, puts it into three-dimensional  
form and displays it in the element view window.  
Switches display mode for the data currently displayed in the Work window area.  
Mono/Color/Pitch  
• Mono: The current image is displayed in monochrome. This parameter is effective only when  
VIVID 910 is connected.  
• Color: The color data acquired from the scan is displayed.  
• Pitch: The color display is done in accordance with the distance data from Near to Far.  
The current step angle is displayed. Normally, the angle is updated when a store operation is car-  
ried out, so additional operations are not necessary. When the step angle has been changed to the  
desired angle manually, data scan can be performed at the new step angles.  
Current Angle  
Memo  
This item is not displayed if “Free” is selected for [Rotation Step].  
Rotates the rotary stage to the desired angle using the slide bar.  
Angle  
This item is displayed when the rotary stage has been initialized successfully.  
Used to scan the Calibration Chart data.  
Chart Scan  
Memo  
This item is displayed if “Free” is selected for [Rotation Step].  
Initializes the rotary stage.  
Stage Apply  
Prev/Next  
Switches from one stored data to another.  
[Prev] button: Displays the previous data.  
[Next] button: Displays the next data.  
Deletes the stored data currently displayed in the Work or Store window area. The corresponding  
Delete  
elements in the element view window are also deleted at the same time.  
Displays/hides the data currently displayed in the Store window area into the element view window.  
View  
OK  
910  
Keeps the element data created during command execution and exits the File-Import-Digitizer-  
One Scan command.  
Note  
If the [Save Raw Data] checkbox is checked, the data save dialog box is displayed.  
Exits the File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan command.  
The element data created during command execution will be deleted.  
Cancel  
Option  
Displays the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialogbox.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step scan-Option] Dialog Box  
Scan Parameter  
Select the scanning mode : FINE or FAST  
Mode  
Scan Parameter  
Load  
:
Loads the setting parameters from VIVID 910 and uses them as parameters for this  
command.  
Save  
:
Saves the parameters set by this command to VIVID 910 as the setting parameters.  
If this button is checked, the program takes multiple shots so as to expand the dynamic range and  
Dynamic Range Expan-  
sion Mode  
reduce data loss. This button is displayed only for the VIVID 910.  
Checking this checkbox enables you to set the brightness of the image.  
Checking this checkbox takes a color shot when a scan is made.  
Brightness  
Use Color  
Log  
Chapter  
2
Performs log correction for the color data if this checkbox is checked. This correction is used to  
make neutral colors brighter.  
File  
Menu  
Performs dark correction for the color data if this checkbox is checked. This correction is used  
when lines are noticeable in the color image.  
Dark  
Convert Parameter  
Save Raw Data  
Checking this checkbox displays the data save dialog at the end of the File-Import-Digitizer-  
Step Scan command, allowing you to save the data.  
Used to select the number of data points to be read from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16” and “No Polygon”.  
Reduction Rate  
Filter  
• None :  
Performs no correction for points when reading data. This can be set for  
User mode only.  
• Noise Filter (N.F.) : Reduces noise in points when reading data.  
• High Quarity (H.Q.) :Deletes low-reliable data when reading data.  
• H.Q. & N.F. :  
Reduces noise in points and deletes low-reliable data when reading data.  
If “ON” is selected, points are generated in the holes that were produced as a loss of data so that  
the holes are filled.  
Fill Holes  
Remove  
Select the data to be deleted when reading data.  
• None :  
Outputs the data without performing specific processing.  
• Boundary(B.):  
Outputs the data after deleting boundary points.  
• 5deg & B./10dwg & B./15deg. & B./20deg & B.:  
Outputs the data after deleting the points present inside and at the bound  
ary of the polygons that are angled within approximately 5, 10, 15 and 20  
degrees to the vector of the line of view.  
Hardware Parameter  
Stage Parameter  
• Vertical :  
• Horizontal :  
Check this checkbox if using the VIVID unit in vertical orientation.  
Check this checkbox if using the VIVID unit in horizontal orientation.  
Note  
After changing the setting orientation, the Calibration Chart data of the rotating stage must be acquired  
again before measuring.  
Select the Port and Model to be used and click the [Apply] button. The rotary stage will be  
initialized. If initialization is successful, the rotary stage can be controlled in the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog box.  
910  
Select rotating angle for each step of rotary stage.  
Restores the default parameter settings.  
Rotation Step  
Default  
OK  
Closes the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box.  
The settings will be set.  
Cancel  
Closes the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Option] dialog box.  
The settings will be cancelled.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Importing Data from the Memory Card of VIVID 910  
This command is used to remote-control the data stored in the memory card of the VIVID 910 (VI-910).  
Note  
Memo  
This command does not operate on step-shot scan data  
in the memory card.  
• Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
1
[Digitizer] and then [PC Card].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box  
will appear.  
Memo  
• Only the raw image data (.cdm) scanned by the VIVID  
910 (VI-910) or VIVID 900 (VI-900) will be displayed.  
• Upper-case file names specified using the camera will  
be converted to lower-case file names when the files are  
imported to this software.  
Select the file you want to import.  
2
• To perform dark correction for the color data,  
check the [Dark Correction] checkbox.  
• To display the preview image, check the [Pre-  
view] checkbox (so that a check mark appears in  
the check box). A color image of the selected file  
will be displayed.  
910  
Memo  
A clock icon will be displayed during loading.  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] Dialog Box  
Displays file names stored in the memory card.  
Displays the dates on which the files are stored in the memory card.  
File name  
Date  
Displays the size of each file (in bytes).  
Size  
Displays the total number of camera data files stored in the memory card.  
Displays the unoccupied capacity and total capacity of the memory card.  
Total ** files  
** MB/ ** MB  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
n Sorting the Files (Sort radio button)  
The [Name] and [Date] radio buttons are used to select whether file names are displayed alphabetically or  
by date.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Name] radio button to sort  
the files alphabetically or [Date] radio  
1
Chapter  
2
button to sort by date.  
File  
Menu  
• When sort is complete, selection state of each file  
in the file list and preview image will be cleared.  
Clicking the [Name] radio button will sort the  
files alphabetically, and clicking the [Date]  
radio button will sort them by date.  
n Updating the File List ([Update] button)  
The [Update] button is used to load the file names from the memory card to this software and update the  
file list. If the memory card is replaced while the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is open, be  
sure to clickthis button to update the file list.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Update] button.  
1
All the file names in the memory card will be  
loaded to the software and a new file list will  
be displayed.  
910  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
n Loading the Selected Data ([Load] button)  
The [Load] button is used to load the data of the selected file from the memory card to the software.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to load.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Load] button.  
A dialog box will appear, allowing you to enter  
the desired element name.  
2
The file name in the memory card will be dis-  
played as an element name.  
Change the element name if necessary,  
and set the parameters.  
3
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
• If you want to program to generate points to fill in  
holes caused by missing data, set the [File Holes]  
setting to “On”.  
• Use the [Remove] pull-down menu to select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
Click the [OK] button.  
4
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
The data of the selected file will be loaded  
and displayed in the element view window.  
The names of the imported elements will also  
appear in the element list, indicating that the  
elements have been selected (highlighted).  
910  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after the  
software is started, it will be fully framed in all  
the windows including those that are hidden.  
Memo  
A clock icon will be displayed during loading.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Load] Dialog Box  
Enter the desired element name.  
Element name  
Reduction Rate  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of the following:  
“1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is On, the pro-  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Fill Holes  
Remove  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the fol-  
lowing: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
None:  
Boundary(B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
Chapter  
2
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15°, or 20 °) to the view vector.  
None: The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
File  
Menu  
Filter  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected  
according to other data.  
High Quality (H.Q.): The program filters out unreliable data.  
H.Q & N.F.:  
Applies both noise filter and high quality filter.  
n Deleting the Selected File ([Delete] button)  
The [Delete] button is used to delete the selected file from the memory card.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to delete.  
1
Click the [Delete] button.  
A message dialog box will appear.  
2
910  
Click the [Delete] button.  
The file will be deleted.  
3
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
n Deleting All the Files ([Delete All] button)  
The [Delete All] button is used to delete all the files from the memory card.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Delete All] button.  
A message dialog box will appear.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Delete All] button.  
All the files in the memory card will be deleted.  
2
Note  
All the files in the memory card will be deleted, irrespec-  
tive of whether or not they are currently selected in the  
file list.  
n Saving the Selected File ([Copy] button)  
The [Copy] button is used to copy the selected file from the memory card and save it as camera data.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to save.  
1
Click the [Copy] button.  
2
The [PC Card-Copy] dialog box will appear.  
The copy destination directory and names of  
the files present in that directory will be dis-  
played.  
910  
Change the directory and file name if  
necessary.  
3
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
Click the [Save] button.  
All the files will be saved as camera data.  
4
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
n Saving All the Files ([Copy All] button)  
The [Copy All] button is used to copy the data of all the files from the memory card and save them as  
camera data.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Copy All] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Copy All]  
dialog box will appear.  
The copy destination directory will be dis-  
played.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Change the directory if necessary.  
2
3
Click the [OK] button.  
All the files will be saved as camera data.  
• If a file(s) having the same name exists, a mes-  
sage dialog box will appear.  
• Clicking the [Overwrite] button will overwrite  
the file which is currently displayed in the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
• Clicking the [Overwrite All] button will over-  
write the file which is currently displayed in the  
message dialog box as well as all the remaining  
files having the same names at once. The mes-  
sage dialog box will not be displayed for those  
remaining files.  
910  
• Clicking the [Skip] button will ignore the file  
displayed in the dialog box and proceed to the  
next file on the file list.  
• Clicking the [Cancel] button will close the  
dialog box without saving the files displayed in  
the dialog box.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 910 is Selected)  
n Changing the Selected File Name ([Rename] button)  
The [Rename] button is used to change the name of the file selected from the memory card.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to save.  
1
Click the [Rename] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Rename]  
dialog box will appear.  
2
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Enter the new name and click the [Re-  
name] button.  
The file name will be changed.  
3
Note  
Names of the files stored in the memory card must con-  
sist of up to eight characters. Only alphabets, numeri-  
cal numbers, bars “–” and underbars “_” can be used.  
Lower-case characters contained in file names will be  
converted to upper-case characters.  
910  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 910 or VIVID 900  
This command is used to cause the VIVID 910 (VI-910) or VIVID 900 (VI-900) to scan the object one scan at  
a time using the remote control function of this software. If a rotating stage has been selected, rotation of the  
stage can also be controlled.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Note  
Memo  
If the rotating stage does not operate correctly from the  
dialog box, turn OFF the stage, turn it ON again, and  
then try to operate it.  
• Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• Note that although this version of the software supports  
simultaneous use of two VIVID 910 or VIVID 900  
units, the software can only access the memory card  
located in the unit with the higher SCSI ID.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Operating Procedure  
• The monochrome monitor image currently captured by  
the VIVID 910 or VIVID 900 will appear in the image  
area of the dialog box.  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
1
[Digitizer] and then [One Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
Set an object in place.  
If you are going to use the rotating stage,  
place the object on it.  
2
To display the object in the middle of  
3
the image area, change the position of  
the object or move the instrument back  
and forth to change the view angle.  
910  
900  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the VIVID.  
In the [Camera1] tab, select the desired  
scan mode (Fine or Fast).  
4
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
If you are going to use the turntable, set  
the serial port and rotating stage type  
to be used under the Hardware tab.  
5
6
Set optional parameters.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
In the [General] tab, click the [Scan]  
button.  
Scan will start, and both color and range im-  
7
ages will be displayed.  
• If the color and range images are not scanned at the  
same time, clicking the [Color Read] button or double-  
clicking on the image will capture a color image and  
display it.  
• Dragging the mouse on the color image will enlarge  
the image. If necessary, enable color correction such as  
“Dark”, “Log” and “Smooth” in the [Camera1] tab, and  
load the color image again.  
• To restart scan, repeat steps 2 to 4. If necessary, click  
the [Mono] button to display a monochrome image.  
Memo  
• In the range image, areas comprised of regular data are  
shown in color.  
• In High Quality mode, data for which laser intensity  
was too high are displayed in bright gray, while data for  
which intensity was too low are displayed in dark gray.  
In the [General] tab, click the [Convert]  
button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Convert]  
8
910  
900  
dialog box will appear.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
9
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
Note  
The element name must consist of up to 31 characters.  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes  
caused by missing data, set the [File Holes] set-  
ting to “On”.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
Chapter  
2
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
File  
Menu  
• To save the raw scan data (.cdm) when importing  
data, check the [Save CDM] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
10  
The scanned image will be displayed. The  
names of the imported elements will also  
appear in the element list, indicating that the  
elements have been selected (highlighted).  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after  
the software is started, it will be fully framed in  
all the windows including those that are hidden  
automatically.  
• If the [Save CDM] checkbox was checked at step  
9, the [Remote-Save] dialog box will appear.  
qEnter the desired file name.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
910  
900  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] Dialog Box  
Executes auto-focus.  
AF  
Displays a monochrome monitoring image.  
Takes and displays a color picture.  
Mono  
Color  
Pitch  
Displays previously scanned pitch image. (This button appears only if you are using two inter-  
connected VIVID units.)  
General Tab  
Distance  
Intensity  
LD  
Checking this checkbox sets [Distance] on.  
Checking this checkbox sets [LD] and [Gain] on.  
Sets the intensity of the laser beam.  
Sets the gain.  
Chapter  
2
Gain  
File  
Menu  
Locks the focus. When you select this item, the program automatically places checks in the [Dis-  
tance] and [Intensity] checkboxes, and displays the currently set position, the current laser-beam  
intensity, and the gain value.  
Focus Lock  
Executes scanning from the VIVID unit.  
Scan  
When you press this button after taking a scan, the program takes a color shot and updates the  
picture on the display. This button is effective only after scanning, and only if [Use Texture] is  
checked and [Auto Read] is unchecked.  
Color Read  
Use when you want the program to load camera data. Opens the [File-Import-Digitizer-One  
Scan-Convert] dialogbox.  
Convert  
Export scanned data in various data formats.  
Export  
Sequentially executes those of the following functions that are checked: [AF], [Scan], [Convert],  
[Export], and [Close].  
Go  
Note that the program runs a SCSI check when the dialog tabs are generated. If the check re-  
veals that two camera units are connected, the dialog will display a [Camera 2] tab as well as the  
[Camera 1] tab. The control content of both tabs will be identical.  
If this checkbox is checked, the program applies log correction for color data. Use when you  
want to brighten up neutral color.  
Camera 1 Tab  
Log  
If this checkbox is checked, the program applies smoothing to color data. Use if illumination is  
low and the image is unclear.  
Smooth  
Dark  
IIf this checkbox is checked, the program applies dark correction to color data. Use if you are  
getting striation-type noise in the images.  
Checking this checkbox sets the program to use color exposure level.  
Color Level  
Threshold  
Fine/Fast  
Checking this checkbox sets the program to use a threshold for distance-image creation.  
Selects the scan mode.  
If this checkbox is checked, the program takes multiple shots so as to expand the dynamic range  
and reduce data loss. This button is displayed only for the VIVID 910.  
Dynamic Range Expan-  
sion Mode  
If this checkbox is checked, the program includes display of low-reliability data. On the range im-  
age, data for which laser intensity was too high appear in light gray, while data for which intensity  
was too low are shown in dark gray. This checkbox appears only if you using the VIVID 910.  
Checking this checkbox enables use of color images when converting and exporting.  
High Quality Mode  
910  
900  
Use Texture  
Memo  
Note that if you use the [Go] button, the program will automatically load color data after scan-  
ning, regardless of whether [Auto Read] is checked.  
Checking this checkbox enables auto-read operation. If auto-read is enabled, the program will load  
data after scanning (after the [Scan] button is clicked), with no need to click the [Color Read] button.  
Sets the number of scan iterations when taking multiple scans.  
Auto read  
Scan loop  
Causes the command to automatically load the parameter settings saved by the [Save Parameters]  
Auto Load Parameters  
feature.  
Saves the parameter settings entered in the [Camera 1] tab.  
Save Parameters  
Load Parameters  
Loads the parameter settings saved by the [Save Parameters] feature.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] Dialog Box  
Hardware Tab  
Check this checkbox if you want the program to automatically check SCSI connections for VIVID  
Auto SCSI ID  
units. If this checkbox is not checked, the program will recognize VIVID units at specified SCSI IDs  
only.  
Mounted  
Apply  
Vertical :  
Check this checkbox if using the VIVID unit in vertical orientation.  
Horizontal : Check this checkbox if using the VIVID unit in horizontal orientation.  
When you click the [Apply] button after selecting the serial port and rotating stage, the [Angle]  
slidebar becomes effective and stage control is enabled.  
Note  
If connecting to a SKIDS-60YAW unit, select “CSG-602R(Ver.1.0)” from the pull-down menu. If connect-  
ing to a SKIDS-60YAW (Ver. 2.0) unit, select “CSG-602(Ver.2.0)”.  
Chapter  
2
This slidebar becomes enabled when the program determines that the rotating stage is operating  
Angle  
File  
Menu  
normally. You can use the slidebar to control the stage’s rotation.  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Convert] Dialog Box  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data.  
Reduction Rate  
You can select any of the following: “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is “On”, the pro-  
Fill Holes  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the  
Remove  
following: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
None:  
Boundary(B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15°, or 20°) to the view vector  
None: The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
Filter  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected  
according to other data.  
High Quality (H.Q.): The program filters out unreliable data. (Effective only when importing data  
that was scanned using the VIVID 910.)  
H.Q & N.F.:  
Applies both noise filter and high quality filter. (Effective only when importing  
data that was scanned using the VIVID 910.)  
Save the images as camera data.  
Save CDM  
910  
900  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 910 or VIVID 900  
This command is used to take two or more shots using the rotating stage via the remote control function of this  
software. If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turntable, rotation of the stage can also be controlled.  
After the necessary shots are taken, scan the calibration chart required for calibration of rotation. Data ac-  
quired from different angles will be subjected to registration, and the resulting data will appear.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Chapter  
2
Note  
Memo  
File  
Menu  
If the rotating stage does not operate correctly from the  
dialog box, turn OFF the stage, turn it ON again, and  
then try to operate it.  
• The calibration chart is an accessory of the rotating  
stage set.  
• Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
• If you have connected multiple VIVID 910 or VIVID 900  
units, you can select the unit to be used by changing the  
SCSI ID. Note that the software can only load memory-  
card data from the VIVID unit with the highest SCSI ID.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
n When Using Only the Rotating Stage  
Operating Procedure  
• The monochrome monitor image currently cap-  
tured by the VIVID 910 or VIVID 900 will appear  
in the image area of the dialog box.  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
[Digitizer] and then [Step Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
1
Place the object on the rotating stage.  
2
3
910  
900  
To display the object in the middle of the  
image area, change the position of the  
object or move the VIVID digitizer back  
and forth to change the view angle.  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the VIVID .  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
In the [Hardware] tab, select the de-  
4
sired rotation step from “90”, “60” and  
“Other” so that the rotating stage will  
rotate at the selected step.  
If “Other” is selected, enter the desired rota-  
tion angle.  
Note  
The rotating stage may rotate in the opposite direction  
during measurement depending on its type.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
To check whether the object is scanned properly when it  
is rotated, click [Check scanning area].  
While the rotating stage rotates at the step selected by Ro-  
tation Step, the monochrome image acquired from each  
angle will be displayed in the preview area.  
When the rotating stage completes one turn, it will return  
to the home position and the check is complete.  
If any problem is detected, repeat step 3.  
In the [Camera1] tab, select the desired  
scan mode (Fine or Fast).  
5
6
Set optional parameters.  
Note  
If high measurement accuracy is required, set the dis-  
tance parameter.  
910  
900  
In the [General] tab, click the [Scan]  
button.  
Scan will start, and both color and range im-  
7
ages will be displayed.  
The “Next angle: **degree” message dialog  
box will also appear.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Memo  
• In the range image, areas comprised of regular data are  
shown in color.  
• In High Quality mode, data for which laser intensity was  
too high are displayed in bright gray, while data for which  
intensity was too low are displayed in dark gray.  
• If the color and range images are not scanned at  
the same time, clicking the [Color Read] button or  
double-clicking on the image will capture a color  
image and display it.  
• Dragging the mouse on the color image will en-  
large the image. If necessary, enable color correc-  
tion such as “Dark”, “Log” and “Smooth”, in the  
[Camera1] tab and load the color image again.  
• If the type of rotating stage has not been desig-  
nated, turn the rotating stage manually to the next  
angle displayed in the “Next angle:** degree”  
message dialog box.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [OK] button.  
8
9
The next specified angle will appear in [Current  
angle], and the object will be scanned for the  
next image.  
• If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turn-  
table, the stage will turn to the next angle and  
then the object will be scanned.  
• To cancel scan, click the [Cancel] button instead  
of the [OK] button, and repeat steps 6 to 8.  
Note  
The rotating stage may rotate in the opposite direction  
during measurement depending on its type.  
Repeat step 8 until shots from all the  
desired angles are captured.  
When shots from all the desired angles are  
captured, the “Scan the chart ? The turntable  
will be move.” message dialog box will appear.  
• If you want to acquire a shot again, click the [Cancel]  
button to close the dialog box, click the angle cur-  
rently displayed in [Current] with the left mouse but-  
ton, then select the desired angle among those which  
have been set from the pulldown menu that appears.  
• Click the [OK] button. The rotating stage will  
start to rotate toward the angle (home position)  
where the calibration chart is to be measured.  
When the rotating stage has reached that angle  
(home position), the “Scanning the Calibration  
Chart.” message dialog box will appear.  
Memo  
If an angle (rotation step) has been selected at step 4,  
necessary steps (angles) to complete 360 degrees will  
be displayed in the pull-down menu. However, it is not  
necessary to scan at all the angles. You can select neces-  
sary steps (angles) only.  
910  
900  
• Click the [OK] button. The rotating stage will  
start to rotate toward the angle (home position)  
where the calibration chart is to be measured.  
When the rotating stage has reached that angle  
(home position), the “Scanning the Calibration  
Chart.” message dialog box will appear.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Place the calibration chart on the rotat-  
ing stage.  
Calibration chart S  
10  
When the “Scanning the Calibration Chart.”  
message dialog box appears, position the  
chart with the black line facing the VIVID, and  
place it on the rotating stage so that both  
entire side surfaces are observed in the view-  
finder.  
• If “Chart” is not displayed in [Current angle],  
click the left mouse button and select “Chart”  
from the pull-down menu that appears.  
Memo  
If it is not possible to perform calibration using calibra-  
tion chart S, use calibration chart M.  
Chapter  
2
#ALIBRATION #HART -  
File  
Menu  
Click the [OK] button.  
The calibration chart will be scanned.  
11  
12  
Good example  
Bad example  
Note  
Make sure that the acquired range image looks like  
the good example given below. If it resembles the bad  
example, click the [Scan] button again to re-scan the  
calibration chart.  
Click the [Convert] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert]  
dialog box will appear.  
910  
900  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
13  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes  
caused by missing data, set the [File Holes] set-  
ting to “On”.  
Note  
The element name must consist of up to 31 alphanu-  
meric characters.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
Chapter  
2
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
File  
Menu  
• If you want to save the raw scan data (.cdm) when  
importing, check the [Save CDM] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
14  
Each scanned image will be subjected to reg-  
istration and displayed, and the “Proceed to  
registration?” message dialog box will appear.  
The element list will also show the element  
name specified at step 13 plus “rotation step”.  
The element name is highlighted, indicating  
that it is currently selected.  
• If the [Save CDM] checkbox was checked at step  
13, the [Remote-Save] dialog box will appear  
before the dialog box that asks whether you want  
to perform fine-registration.  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed (i.e. the windows  
that are not set to “Selective”).  
qEnter the desired file name.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after  
the software is started, it will be fully framed in  
all the windows including those that are hidden  
automatically.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
• If a rotating stage has been designated, the rotat-  
ing stage will rotate back to the original position  
before data reading starts.  
910  
900  
Click the [OK] button.  
15  
• If you are not going to perform fine-registration,  
click the [Cancel] button instead of the [OK] button.  
Fine-registration of the element position will  
be performed and the data will be displayed  
again.  
Memo  
• If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turn-  
table, the stage will turn to the next angle and  
then the object will be scanned.  
Fine-registration can be cancelled even if it has started, by  
clicking the [Cancel] button in the dialog box that appears  
during fine-registration.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
n When Using the Bench Top Frame Set  
Memo  
The VIVID 910 or VIVID 900 can be mounted on the bench top frame set vertically or horizontally.  
For the mounting method, refer to the instruction manual of the frame set.  
Saving the calibration chart data helps you reduce work time when scanning different objects under the same conditions.  
Operating Procedure  
• The monochrome monitor image currently cap-  
tured by the VIVID 910 or VIVID 900 will ap-  
pear in the image area of the dialog box.  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
[Digitizer] and then [Step Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Select the desired installation direction  
of the VIVID digitizer.  
2
From the [Hardware] tab, check the [Bench  
Top Frame set] checkbox, and select the VIVID  
digitizer installation direction by clicking the  
corresponding [Mounted] radio button.  
Select [Vertical] if the VIVID 910 or VIVID 900 is  
mounted vertically, or select [Horizontal] if it is  
mounted horizontally.  
Memo  
If the VIVID digitizer is mounted horizontally, the pre-  
view image will be in portrait form.  
After the image is converted to 3D, it will be displayed  
according to the coordinate system of the VIVID.  
Place the object on the rotating stage.  
3
4
Note  
If the VIVID digitizer is mounted on the frame set hori-  
zontally, the object will be affected by repeated reflection  
on the rotating stage surface, preventing correct scan  
operation. To prevent this, place an appropriate item of  
the following thickness under the object to raise it.  
910  
900  
Measurement Distance  
600 mm  
Thickness of Item  
Approx. 30 mm  
Approx. 20 mm  
1000 mm  
To display the object in the middle of  
the image area, change the position of  
the object or move the instrument back  
and forth to change the view angle.  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the VIVID  
digitizer.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
In the [Hardware] tab, select the de-  
sired rotation step from “90”, “60” and  
“Other” so that the rotating stage will  
rotate at the selected step.  
5
If “Other” is selected, enter the desired rota-  
tion angle.  
Note  
The rotating stage may rotate in the opposite direction  
during measurement depending on its type.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
In the [Camera1] tab, select the desired  
scan mode (Fine or Fast).  
6
7
To check whether the object is scanned properly when it  
is rotated, click [Check scanning area].  
While the rotating stage rotates at the step selected by Ro-  
tation Step, the monochrome image acquired from each  
angle will be displayed in the preview area.  
When the rotating stage completes one turn, it will return  
to the home position and the check is complete.  
If any problem is detected, repeat step 4.  
Set optional parameters.  
Note  
If high measurement accuracy is required, set the dis-  
tance parameter in the [General] tab.  
910  
900  
In the [Geneal] tab, click the [Scan]  
button.  
Scan will start, and both color and range im-  
8
ages will be displayed.  
The “Next angle: **degree” message dialog  
box will also appear.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
• If the color and range images are not scanned at  
the same time, clicking the [Color Read] button or  
double-clicking on the image will capture a color  
image in the [General] tab in the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog box and display it.  
• Dragging the mouse on the color image will  
enlarge the image. If necessary, enable color cor-  
rection such as “Dark”, “Log” and “Smooth”, and  
load the color image again.  
• If the type of rotating stage has not been desig-  
nated, turn the rotating stage manually to the next  
angle displayed in the “Next angle: **degree”  
message dialog box.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
Step 8 and subsequent steps can be processed automati-  
cally. (For details, refer to page 90.)  
Click the [OK] button.  
9
The next specified angle will appear in [Current  
angle], and the object will be scanned for the  
next image.  
• If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turn-  
table, the stage will turn to the next angle and  
then the object will be scanned.  
• To cancel scan, click the [Cancel] button instead  
of the [OK] button, and repeat steps 6 to 8.  
Note  
The rotating stage may rotate in the opposite direction  
during measurement depending on its type.  
Repeat step 9 until shots from all the  
desired angles are captured.  
10  
When shots from all the desired angles are  
captured, the “Read the chart data ?” mes-  
sage dialog box will appear.  
If calibration chart data already exists, click  
the [OK] button to import it. After the data has  
been imported, proceed to step 13.  
If you click the [Cancel] button, the CScan  
the chart? The turntable will be move.” mes-  
sage dialog box will appear. If you click [OK]  
button the stage will move to the angle that  
allows measurement of the calibration, and  
the “Scanning the Calibration Chart.” message  
dialog box will appear.  
910  
900  
Note  
If no chart data exists or the existing chart data does not  
match the measurement conditions, the following error  
messages will appear.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Place the calibration chart on the rotat-  
ing stage.  
11  
Calibration chart S  
Position the chart with the black line facing  
the VIVID digitizer, and place it on the rotat-  
ing stage so that both entire side surfaces are  
observed in the viewfinder.  
• If “Chart” is not displayed in [Current angle],  
click the left mouse button and select “Chart”  
from the pull-down menu that appears.  
Memo  
If it is not possible to perform calibration using calibra-  
tion chart S, use calibration chart M.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
#ALIBRATION #HART -  
Click the [OK] button.  
12  
The calibration chart will be scanned, and the  
“Save the chart data ?” message dialog box  
will appear.  
To save the calibration chart data, click the  
[OK] button.  
Memo  
910  
900  
Saving the calibration chart data helps you reduce work  
time when scanning different objects under the same  
conditions.  
Good example  
Bad example  
Note  
• If accurate data is required, it is recommended that  
calibration be performed each time.  
• Make sure that the acquired range image looks like  
the good example given below. If it resembles the bad  
example, click the [Scan] button again to re-scan the  
calibration chart.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Click the [Convert] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert]  
dialog box will appear.  
13  
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
1
4
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16”, and “No polygon”, by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Note  
The element name must consist of up to 31 alphanu-  
meric characters.  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes caused  
by missing data, set the [File Holes] setting to “On”.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the ap-  
propriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down menu.  
• If you want to save the raw scan data (.cdm) when  
importing, check the [Save CDM] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
15  
Each scanned image will be subjected to reg-  
istration and displayed, and the “Proceed to  
registration?” message dialog box will appear.  
The element list will also show the element  
name specified at step 14 plus “rotation step”.  
The element name is highlighted, indicating  
that it is currently selected.  
• If the [Save CDM] checkbox was checked at step  
14, the [Remote-Save] dialog box will appear  
before the dialog box that asks whether you want  
to perform fine-registration.  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed (i.e. the windows  
that are not set to “Selective”).  
qEnter the desired file name.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after  
the software is started, it will be fully framed in  
all the windows including those that are hidden  
automatically.  
Note  
910  
900  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
• If a rotating stage has been designated, the rotat-  
ing stage will rotate back to the original position  
before data reading starts.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Click the [OK] button.  
16  
Fine-registration of the element position will  
be performed and the data will be displayed  
again.  
• If you are not going to perform fine-registration,  
click the [Cancel] button instead of the [OK] but-  
ton.  
• If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turn-  
table, the stage will turn to the next angle and  
then the object will be scanned.  
Memo  
Fine-registration can be cancelled even if it has started, by  
clicking the [Cancel] button in the dialog box that appears  
during fine-registration.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
910  
900  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
n Performing Scan Operations Automatically  
If the bench top frame set is used and calibration chart data exists, a series of scan operations can be pro-  
cessed automatically.  
Memo  
For details of how to save the calibration chart data, refer  
to page 87,88.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
[Digitizer] and then [Step Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
1
• The monochrome monitor image currently cap-  
tured by the VIVID 910 or VIVID 900 will ap-  
pear in the image area of the dialog box.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Select the desired installation direction  
of the VIVID digitizer.  
2
From the [Hardware] tab, check the [Bench  
Top Frame set] checkbox, and select the VIVID  
digitizer installation direction by clicking the  
corresponding [Mounted] radio button.  
Check the [Auto Scan] checkbox under the  
[Hardware] tab.  
Select [Vertical] if the VIVID digitizer is  
mounted vertically, or select [Horizontal] if it is  
mounted horizontally.  
Memo  
If the VIVID digitizer is mounted horizontally, the pre-  
view image will be in portrait form.  
After the image is converted to 3D, it will be displayed ac-  
cording to the coordinate system of the VIVID.  
Place the object on the rotating stage.  
3
4
Note  
If the VIVID digitizer is mounted on the frame set hori-  
zontally, the object will be affected by repeated reflection  
on the rotating stage surface, preventing correct scan  
operation. To prevent this, place an appropriate item of  
the following thickness under the object to raise it.  
910  
900  
Measurement  
Distance  
Thickness of Item  
600 mm  
Approx. 30 mm  
Approx. 20 mm  
1000 mm  
To display the object in the middle of the  
image area, change the position of the  
object or move the rotating stage back  
and forth to change the view angle.  
Memo  
If necessary, replace the lens attached to the VIVID  
digitizer.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
In the [Hardware] tab, select the de-  
sired rotation step from “90”, “60” and  
“Other” so that the rotating stage will  
rotate at the selected step.  
5
If “Other” is selected, enter the desired rota-  
tion angle.  
Note  
The rotating stage may rotate in the opposite direction  
during measurement depending on its type.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
To check whether the object is scanned properly when it  
is rotated, click [Check scanning area].  
While the rotating stage rotates at the step selected by Ro-  
tation Step, the monochrome image acquired from each  
angle will be displayed in the preview area.  
When the rotating stage completes one turn, it will return  
to the home position and the check is complete.  
If any problem is detected, repeat step 4.  
In the [General] tab, select the desired  
scan mode (Fine or Fast).  
6
7
Set optional parameters.  
• Check the [Convert] checkbox of the [Scan &  
Functions] in the [General] tab.  
Note  
If high measurement accuracy is required, set the dis-  
tance parameter in the [General] tab.  
910  
900  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
In the [General] tab, click the [Go] but-  
ton.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert]  
8
dialog box will appear.  
Chapter  
2
Note  
File  
Menu  
If no chart data exists or the existing chart data does not  
match the measurement conditions, the following error  
messages will appear.  
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
9
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
Note  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes  
caused by missing data, set the [File Holes] set-  
ting to “On”.  
The element name must consist of up to 31 alphanu-  
meric characters.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
• If you want to save the raw scan data (.cdm) when  
importing, check the [Save CDM] checkbox.  
910  
900  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Click the [OK] button.  
the “Proceed to registration?” message dialog  
box will appear.  
10  
The element list will also show the element  
name specified at step 9 plus “rotation step”.  
The element name is highlighted, indicating  
that it is currently selected.  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed (i.e. the windows  
that are not set to “Selective”).  
• If the [Save CDM] checkbox was checked at  
step 9, the [Remote-Save] dialog box will appear  
Chapter  
2
before the dialog box that asks whether you want  
to perform fine-registration.  
File  
Menu  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after  
the software is started, it will be fully framed in  
all the windows including those that are hidden  
automatically.  
qEnter the desired file name.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
• If a rotating stage has been designated, the rotat-  
ing stage will rotate back to the original position  
before data reading starts.  
Click the [OK] button.  
• If you are not going to perform fine-registration,  
click the [Cancel] button instead of the [OK] but-  
ton.  
11  
The object will be scanned sequentially at the  
step selected by Rotation Step. Registration of  
the scanned images will be performed using  
the saved chart data to convert them to 3D  
data, and the result will be displayed.  
Note  
The rotating stage may rotate in the opposite direction  
during measurement depending on its type.  
910  
900  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan]Dialog Box  
Executes auto-focus.  
AF  
Displays a monochrome monitoring image.  
Takes and displays a color picture.  
Mono  
Color  
General Tab  
Distance  
Intensity  
LD  
Checking this checkbox sets [Distance] on.  
Checking this checkbox sets [LD] and [Gain] on.  
Sets the intensity of the laser beam.  
Sets the gain.  
Gain  
Locks the focus. When you select this item, the program automatically places checks in the [Dis-  
tance] and [Intensity] checkboxes, and displays the currently set position, the current laser-beam  
intensity, and the gain value.  
Focus Lock  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Causes the VIVID unit to execute a scan.  
Scan (Auto Scan)  
If [Auto Scan] (in the [Hardware] tab) is checked, this name for this control becomes [Auto Scan].  
When you press this button after taking a scan, the program takes a color shot and updates the  
picture on the display. This button is effective only after scanning, and only if [Use Texture] is  
checked and [Auto Read] is unchecked.  
Color Read  
Use when you want the program to load camera data. Opens the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step  
Scan-Convert] dialog box.  
Convert  
Export scanned data in various data formats.  
Export  
Sequentially executes those of the following functions that are checked: [AF], [Scan], [Convert],  
[Export], and [Close].  
Go  
Camera 1 Tab  
Log  
If this checkbox is checked, the program applies log correction for color data. Use when you  
want to brighten up neutral color.  
If this checkbox is checked, the program applies smoothing to color data. Use if illumination is  
low and the image is unclear.  
Smooth  
Dark  
If this checkbox is checked, the program applies dark correction to color data. Use if you are get-  
ting striation-type noise in the images.  
Checking this checkbox sets the program to use color exposure level.  
Color Level  
Threshold  
Fine/Fast  
Checking this checkbox sets the program to use a threshold for distance-image creation.  
Selects the scan mode.  
If this checkbox is checked, the program takes multiple shots so as to expand the dynamic range  
and reduce data loss. This checkbox is displayed only for the VIVID 910.  
Dynamic Range Expan-  
sion Mode  
If this box is checked, the program includes display of low-reliability data. On the range image,  
data for which laser intensity was too high appear in light gray, while data for which intensity  
was too low are shown in dark gray. This checkbox appears only if you using the VIVID 910.  
Checking this checkbox enables use of color images when converting and exporting.  
High Quality Mode  
Use Texture  
Memo  
Note that if you use the [Go] button, the program will automatically load color data after scan-  
910  
900  
ning, regardless of whether [Auto Read] is checked.  
Checking this checkbox enables auto-read operation. If auto-read is enabled, the program will  
load data after scanning (after the [Scan] button is clicked), with no need to click the [Color  
Read] button.  
Auto read  
Causes the command to automatically load the parameter settings saved by the [Save Parameters]  
feature.  
Auto Load Parameters  
Saves the parameter settings entered in the [Camera 1] tab.  
Save Parameters  
Load Parameters  
Loads the parameter settings saved by the Save [Parameters] feature.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] Dialog Box  
Hardware Tab  
Check this checkbox if you want the program to automatically check SCSI connections for  
Auto SCSI ID  
VIVID units. If this checkbox is not checked, the program will recognize VIVID units at specified  
SCSI IDs only.  
Mounted  
Apply  
Vertical :  
Check this checkbox if using the VIVID unit in vertical orientation.  
Horizontal : Check this checkbox if using the VIVID unit in horizontal orientation.  
To change the rotation stage being controlled: Select the appropriate serial port and rotation  
stage, and then click [Apply].  
Note  
If connecting to a SKIDS-60YAW unit, select “CSG-602R(Ver.1.0)” from the pull-down menu. If con-  
necting to a SKIDS-60YAW (Ver. 2.0) unit, select “CSG-602(Ver.2.0)”.  
Chapter  
2
Sets the rotational step, in degrees. You can set this to 90, to 60, or to “Other”. If you select  
“Other”, you can proceed to enter your own custom setting.  
Rotation Step  
Current angle  
File  
Menu  
Selects the scanning step (the scan angle). When the dialog box opens, the setting is “0”.  
To change the setting, left-click on the angle to open the pull-down menu, and then enter the  
scanning step (angle) that you wish to use. If you enter an angle that was already used for a scan  
and then proceed to click the [Scan] button, the new scan data will overwrite the previous data  
for that angle.  
Turns the rotating stage through the angle set by the Rotation Step setting, while displaying  
a monochrome image in the preview window.  
Check Scanning area  
Checking this item enables the [Auto Scan] function.  
Bench Top Frame Set  
Auto Scan  
The program automatically scans over the angle set by the [Rotation Step] setting, and automati-  
cally reads in the resulting camera data.  
Displays the information ([Lens Type], [Mode], [Distance], [Setting]) of the saved calibration data.  
Chart File Data  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert] Dialog Box  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of the follow-  
Reduction Rate  
ing: “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is “On”, the pro-  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Fill Holes  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the  
following: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
Remove  
None:  
Boundary(B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15°, or 20°) to the view vector  
None: The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
Filter  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected  
according to other data.  
910  
900  
High Quality (H.Q.): The program filters out unreliable data. (Effective only when importing data  
that was scanned using the VIVID 910.)  
H.Q & N.F.:  
Applies both noise filter and high quality filter. (Effective only when importing  
data that was scanned using the VIVID 910.)  
Save the images as camera data.  
Save CDM  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Importing Data from the Memory Card of VIVID 910 or VIVID 900  
This command is used to remote-control the data stored in the memory card of the VIVID 910 (VI-910) or  
VIVID 900 (VI-900).  
Note  
Memo  
This command does not operate on step-shot scan data  
in the memory card.  
• Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
• Note that if multiple VIVID units are connected,  
the software can only access the memory card in the  
VIVID unit with the highest SCSI ID setting.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
1
[Digitizer] and then [PC Card].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box  
will appear.  
Memo  
• Only the raw image data (.cdm) scanned by the VIVID  
910(VI-910) or VIVID 900(VI-900) will be displayed.  
• Upper-case file names specified using the camera will  
be converted to lower-case file names when the files are  
imported to this software.  
Select the file you want to import.  
2
• To perform dark correction for the color data,  
check the [Dark Correction] checkbox.  
• To display the preview image, check the [Pre-  
view] checkbox (so that a check mark appears in  
the check box). A color image of the selected file  
will be displayed.  
910  
900  
Memo  
A clock icon will be displayed during loading.  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] Dialog Box  
Displays file names stored in the memory card.  
Displays the dates on which the files are stored in the memory card.  
File name  
Date  
Displays the size of each file (in bytes).  
Size  
Displays the total number of camera data files stored in the memory card.  
Displays the unoccupied capacity and total capacity of the memory card.  
Total **files  
** MB/ ** MB  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
n Sorting the Files (Sort radio button)  
The [Name] and [Date] radio buttons are used to select whether file names are displayed alphabetically or  
by date.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Name] radio button to sort  
the files alphabetically or [Date] radio  
button to sort by date.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• When sort is complete, selection state of each file  
in the file list and preview image will be cleared.  
Clicking the [Name] radio button will sort the  
files alphabetically, and clicking the [Date]  
radio button will sort them by date.  
n Updating the File List ([Update] button)  
The [Update] button is used to load the file names from the memory card to this software and update the  
file list. If the memory card is replaced while the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is open, be  
sure to clickthis button to update the file list.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Update] button.  
1
All the file names in the memory card will be  
loaded to the software and a new file list will  
be displayed.  
910  
900  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
n Loading the Selected Data ([Load] button)  
The [Load] button is used to load the data of the selected file from the memory card to the software.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to load.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Load] button.  
A dialog box will appear, allowing you to enter  
the desired element name.  
2
The file name in the memory card will be dis-  
played as an element name.  
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
Change the element name if necessary,  
and set the parameters.  
3
• If you want to program to generate points to fill in  
holes caused by missing data, set the [File Holes]  
setting to “On”.  
• Use the [Remove] pull-down menu to select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
Click the [OK] button.  
4
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
The data of the selected file will be loaded  
and displayed in the element view window.  
The names of the imported elements will also  
appear in the element list, indicating that the  
elements have been selected (highlighted).  
910  
900  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after the  
software is started, it will be fully framed in all  
the windows including those that are hidden.  
Memo  
A clock icon will be displayed during loading.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Load] Dialog Box  
Enter the desired element name.  
Element name  
Reduction Rate  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of the following:  
“1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is On, the pro-  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Fill Holes  
Remove  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the fol-  
lowing: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
None:  
Boundary(B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
Chapter  
2
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15°, or 20 °) to the view vector.  
None: The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
File  
Menu  
Filter  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected  
according to other data.  
High Quality (H.Q.): The program filters out unreliable data. (Effective only when importing data  
that was scanned using the VIVID 910.)  
H.Q & N.F.:  
Applies both noise filter and high quality filter. (Effective only when importing  
data that was scanned using the VIVID 910.)  
n Deleting the Selected File ([Delete] button)  
The [Delete] button is used to delete the selected file from the memory card.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to delete.  
1
Click the [Delete] button.  
A message dialog box will appear.  
2
910  
900  
Click the [Delete] button.  
The file will be deleted.  
3
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
n Deleting All the Files ([Delete All] button)  
The [Delete All] button is used to delete all the files from the memory card.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Delete All] button.  
A message dialog box will appear.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Delete All] button.  
All the files in the memory card will be deleted.  
2
Note  
All the files in the memory card will be deleted, irrespec-  
tive of whether or not they are currently selected in the  
file list.  
n Saving the Selected File ([Copy] button)  
The [Copy] button is used to copy the selected file from the memory card and save it as camera data.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to save.  
1
Click the [Copy] button.  
2
The [PC Card-Copy] dialog box will appear.  
The copy destination directory and names of  
the files present in that directory will be dis-  
played.  
910  
900  
Change the directory and file name if  
necessary.  
3
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
Click the [Save] button.  
All the files will be saved as camera data.  
4
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
n Saving All the Files ([Copy All] button)  
The [Copy All] button is used to copy the data of all the files from the memory card and save them as  
camera data.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Copy All] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Copy All]  
dialog box will appear.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
The copy destination directory will be dis-  
played.  
Change the directory if necessary.  
2
Click the [Copy All] button.  
All the files will be saved as camera data.  
3
• If a file(s) having the same name exists, a mes-  
sage dialog box will appear.  
• Clicking the [Overwrite] button will overwrite  
the file which is currently displayed in the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
• Clicking the [Overwrite All] button will over-  
write the file which is currently displayed in the  
message dialog box as well as all the remaining  
files having the same names at once. The mes-  
sage dialog box will not be displayed for those  
remaining files.  
910  
900  
• Clicking the [Skip] button will ignore the file  
displayed in the dialog box and proceed to the  
next file on the file list.  
• Clicking the [Cancel] button will close the  
dialog box without saving the files displayed in  
the dialog box.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 900/910 is Selected)  
n Changing the Selected File Name ([Rename] button)  
The [Rename] button is used to change the name of the file selected from the memory card.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to save.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Rename] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Rename]  
dialog box will appear.  
2
Enter the new name and click the [Re-  
name] button.  
The file name will be changed.  
3
Note  
Names of the files stored in the memory card must con-  
sist of up to eight characters. Only alphabets, numeri-  
cal numbers, bars “–” and underbars “_” can be used.  
Lower-case characters contained in file names will be  
converted to upper-case characters.  
910  
900  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 700  
This command is used to cause the VIVID 700 (VI-700) to scan the object one scan at a time using the remote  
control function of this software.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Memo  
Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
1
[Digitizer] and then [One Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
• The color monitor image currently captured by  
the VIVID 700 will appear in the “Color” area of  
the dialog box. (No color image will appear if the  
[Auto read] checkbox is unchecked even if the  
[Option] checkbox is checked.)  
Set an object in place.  
2
Move the Zoom bar to set the desired  
view angle.  
3
A new color image captured from the speci-  
fied view angle will appear. (No color image  
will appear if the [Auto read] checkbox is un-  
checked.)  
Set optional parameters.  
Check the [Option] checkbox, and make nec-  
essary parameters.  
• To set the scan reference position ([Distance])  
and laser intensity ([Laser Intensity] ), perform  
the following procedure.  
4
700  
qCheck the [Option] checkbox.  
wCheck the [Manual] checkbox.  
eMove the Distance bar or Laser Intensity bar to  
the desired position.  
• If you are not going to scan both color and range  
images at the same time, uncheck the [Auto read]  
checkbox.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Click the [Scan] button.  
Scan will start, and both color and range im-  
ages will be displayed.  
5
• If the color and range images are not scanned at  
the same time, clicking the [Read] button will  
capture a color image and display it.  
• To restart scan, repeat steps 2 to 4.  
Click the [Convert] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Convert]  
dialog box will appear.  
6
7
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Note  
The element name must consist of up to 31 alphanu-  
meric characters.  
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes caused  
by missing data, set the [File Holes] setting to “On”.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the ap-  
propriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down menu.  
• To save the raw scan data (.cam) when importing  
data, check the [Save camera data] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
8
• If the [Save camera data] checkbox was checked  
at step 7, the [Remote-Save] dialog box will ap-  
pear  
The scanned image will be displayed. The  
names of the imported elements will also  
appear in the element list, indicating that the  
elements have been selected (highlighted).  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
qEnter the desired file name.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after  
the software is started, it will be fully framed in  
all the windows including those that are hidden  
automatically.  
700  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] Dialog Box  
Zoom  
Scan  
Used to set zoom level of the VIVID 700 (VI-700) series digitizer.  
Causes the VIVID 700 (VI-700) to acquire a shot.  
Option  
If this checkbox is checked, the lower section of the [Digitizer-One Scan] dialog box will be active, al-  
lowing you to set various parameters including [Distance], [Laser Intensity] and [Auto read].  
Manual  
If this checkbox is checked, the [Distance] and [Laser Intensity] parameters can be set.  
Used to set the instrument’s scan reference position.  
Distance  
Laser Intensity  
Auto read  
Used to set the laser beam intensity of the VIVID.  
If this checkbox is checked, a color image will be read automatically when the dialog box is  
opened. Even if the [Read] button is not clicked after the [Scan] button is clicked, the data will be  
read automatically after images are acquired, and the color image and range image will be dis-  
played in the dialog box. If there is no check mark in the [Option] checkbox, for instance when the  
software is just started up, the [Auto read] checkbox will be checked automatically.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Read  
Clicking this checkbox while there is no check mark in the [Auto read] checkbox will read data  
from the instrument and display the range image and the latest color image that were acquired  
when the [Scan] button was clicked last time in the dialog box. This button is effective only if the  
[Auto read] checkbox is unchecked.  
Focus Lock  
Convert  
Sets the focus lock. The [Manual] checkbox will be checked automatically, and the current posi-  
tion and Laser Intensity will be displayed.  
Causes the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Convert] dialog box to appear, allowing import of the  
camera data to this software.  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Convert] Dialog Box  
Reduction Rate  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of the follow-  
ing: “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Fill Holes  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is “On”, the pro-  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Remove  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the fol-  
lowing: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
None:  
Boundary(B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15°, or 20 °) to the view vector.  
Filter  
None:  
Removal is not carried out when exporting the data.  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected  
according to other data.  
Save camera data  
Save the images as camera data.  
700  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 700  
This command is used to take two or more shots using the optional rotating stage via the remote control func-  
tion of this software. If a rotating stage has been selected by the rotating table, rotation of the stage can also be  
controlled.  
After the necessary shots are taken, scan the calibration chart. Data acquired from different angles will be  
subjected to registration, and the resulting data will appear.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Note  
Memo  
If the rotating stage does not operate correctly from the  
dialog box, turn OFF the stage, turn it ON again, and  
then try to operate it.  
• The calibration chart is an accessory of the rotating  
stage set.  
• Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
1
[Digitizer] and then [Step Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
• The color monitor image currently captured by  
the VIVID 700 will appear in the “Color” area of  
the dialog box. (No color image will appear if the  
[Auto read] checkbox is unchecked even if the  
[Option] checkbox is checked.)  
Place the object on the rotating stage.  
2
Select the desired rotation step from  
3
“90”, “60” and “Other”. The rotating  
stage will rotate at the selected step.  
If “Other” is selected, enter the desired rota-  
tion angle.  
Move the Zoom bar to set the desired  
view angle.  
4
700  
A new color image captured from the speci-  
fied view angle will appear. (No color image  
will appear if the [Auto read] checkbox is un-  
checked.)  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Set optional parameters.  
Check the [Option] checkbox, and make nec-  
essary parameters.  
• To set the scan reference position (Distance) and  
laser intensity (Laser Intensity), perform the fol-  
lowing procedure.  
5
qCheck the [Option] checkbox.  
wCheck the [Manual] checkbox.  
eMove the Distance bar or Laser Intensity bar to  
the desired position.  
• If you are not going to scan both color and range  
images at the same time, uncheck the [Auto read]  
checkbox.  
Chapter  
2
Click the [Scan] button.  
Scan will start, and both color and range im-  
ages will be displayed.  
The “Next shot? (angle:**)” message dialog  
box will also appear.  
6
7
File  
Menu  
• If the color and range images are not scanned at  
the same time, clicking the [Read] button will  
capture a color image and display it.  
• If the type of rotating stage has not been desig-  
nated, turn the rotating stage manually to the next  
angle displayed in the “Next shot? (angle:**)]  
message dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The next specified angle will appear in [Current  
Angle],  
• To cancel scan, click the [Cancel] button instead  
of the [OK] button, and repeat steps 4 to 6.  
and the object will be scanned for the next  
image.  
• If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turn-  
table, the stage will turn to the next angle and  
then the object will be scanned.  
Repeat step 7 until shots from all the  
desired  
angles are captured.  
8
When shots from all the desired angles are  
captured,  
the “Next shot? Please set the chart.” mes-  
sage dialog box will appear.  
• If you want to acquire a shot from a certain angle  
again, click the angle currently displayed in [Cur-  
rent Angle] with the left mouse button, then select  
the desired angle from the pull-down menu that  
appears.  
700  
Memo  
If an angle (rotation step) has been selected at step 3,  
necessary steps (angles) to complete 360 degrees will  
be displayed in the pull-down menu. However, it is not  
necessary to scan at all the angles. You can select neces-  
sary steps (angles) only.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer –Step Scan (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Place the calibration chart on the rotat-  
ing stage.  
Position the chart with the black line facing the  
9
instrument  
and place it on the rotating stage so that both  
entire side surfaces are observed in the view-  
finder.  
• If “Chart” is not displayed in [Current Angle],  
click the left mouse button and select “Chart”  
from the pull-down menu that appears.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
The calibration chart can be scanned at any angle of the  
rotating stage.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The calibration chart will be scanned.  
10  
11  
Good example  
Bad example  
Note  
Make sure that the acquired range image looks like  
the good example given below. If it resembles the bad  
example, click the [Scan] button again to re-scan the  
calibration chart.  
Click the [Convert] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert]  
dialog box will appear.  
700  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
12  
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
Note  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes  
caused by missing data, set the [File Holes] set-  
ting to “On”.  
The element name must consist of up to 31 characters.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
Chapter  
2
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
File  
Menu  
• To save the raw scan data (.cam) when importing  
data, check the [Save camera data] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
13  
Each scanned image will be subjected to reg-  
istration and displayed, and the “Proceed to  
registration?” message dialog box will appear.  
The element list will also show the element  
name specified at step 12 plus “rotation step”.  
The element name is highlighted, indicating  
that it is currently selected.  
• If the [Save camera data] checkbox was checked  
at step 12, the [Remote-Save] dialog box will ap-  
pear before the one that asks whether you want to  
perform fine-registration.  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
qEnter the desired file name.  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after  
the software is started, it will be fully framed in  
all the windows including those that are hidden  
automatically.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters only.  
• If a rotating stage has been designated, the rotat-  
ing stage will rotate back to the original position  
before data reading starts.  
700  
Click the [OK] button.  
Fine-registration will be performed and the  
data will be displayed again.  
14  
• If you are not going to perform fine-registration,  
click the [Cancel] button instead of the [OK] button.  
• If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turn-  
table, the stage will turn to the next angle and  
then scan will be performed.  
Memo  
Fine-registration can be cancelled even if it has started, by  
clicking the [Cancel] button in the dialog box that appears  
during fine-registration.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] Dialog Box  
Used to set the serial port and rotating stage type to be used for remote operation.  
Turntable  
Note  
If connecting to a SKIDS-60YAW unit, select “CSG-602R(Ver.1.0)” from the pull-down menu.  
If connecting to a SKIDS-60YAW (Ver. 2.0) unit, select “CSG-602(Ver.2.0)”.  
Used to select the desired angle (degree) of the rotating stage from “90”, “60” and “Other”. If  
“Other” is selected, enter the desired rotation step.  
Rotation step  
Current Angle  
Used to select the desired scan step (i.e. the angle at which scan is to be performed). “0” will be  
selected first when the dialog box is opened. It is possible to select the desired angle by clicking  
the angle currently displayed in [Current Angle] and selecting the desired angle from the pull-  
down menu that appears. If an angle at which scan has already been performed is selected again  
and the [Scan] button is clicked, the previously acquired image data will be overwritten.  
Used to set zoom level of the VIVID 700 (VI-700).  
Zoom  
Scan  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Causes the VIVID 700 (VI-700) to acquire a shot.  
If this checkbox is checked, the lower section of the [Remote-Step Scan] dialog box will be active,  
allowing you to set various parameters including [Distance], [Laser Intensity] and [Auto read].  
If this checkbox is checked, the [Distance] and [Laser Intensity] parameters can be set.  
Option  
Manual  
Used to set the instrument’s scan reference position.  
Distance  
Used to set the laser beam intensity of the VIVID.  
Laser Intensity  
Auto read  
If this checkbox is checked, a color image will be read automatically when the dialog box is  
opened. Even if the [Read] button is not clicked after the [Scan] button is clicked, the data will be  
read automatically after images are acquired, and the color image and range image will be dis-  
played in the dialog box. If there is no check mark in the [Option] checkbox, for instance when the  
software is just started up, the [Auto read] checkbox will be checked automatically.  
Clicking this button while there is no check mark in the [Auto read] checkbox will read data from  
the instrument and display the range image and the latest color image that were acquired when  
the [Scan] button was clicked last time in the dialog box. This button is effective only if the [Auto  
read] checkbox is unchecked.  
Read  
Sets the focus lock. The [Manual] checkbox will be checked automatically, and the current posi-  
tion and Laser Intensity will be displayed.  
Focus Lock  
Convert  
Causes the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert] dialog box to appear, allowing import of the  
camera data to this software.  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert] Dialog Box  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of the follow-  
Reduction Rate  
ing: “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is “On”, the pro-  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the fol-  
lowing: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
Fill Holes  
Remove  
None:  
Boundary(B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
700  
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15°, or 20 °) to the view vector  
The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
Filter  
None:  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected  
according to other data.  
Save the images as camera data.  
Save camera data  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Importing Data from the Memory Card of VIVID 700  
This command is used to remote-control the data stored in the memory card of the VIVID 700 (VI-700).  
Note  
Memo  
This command does not operate on step-scan scan data  
in the memory card.  
Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
Chapter  
2
1
File  
Menu  
[Digitizer] and then [PC Card].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box  
will appear.  
Memo  
Upper-case file names specified using the camera will  
be converted to lower-case file names when the files are  
imported to this software.  
Select the file you want to import.  
• To display the preview image, check the [Preview  
Image] checkbox (so that a check mark appears in  
the check box). A color image of the selected file  
will be displayed.  
2
Memo  
A clock icon will be displayed during loading.  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] Dialog Box  
Displays file names stored in the memory card.  
Displays the dates on which the files are stored in the memory card.  
File name  
Date  
Displays the size of each file (in bytes).  
Size  
Displays the total number of camera data files stored in the memory card.  
Displays the unoccupied capacity and total capacity of the memory card.  
Total ** files  
** MB/ ** MB  
700  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
n Sorting the Files (Sort radio button)  
The [Name] and [Date] radio buttons are used to select whether file names are displayed alphabetically or  
by date.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Name] radio button to sort  
the files alphabetically or [Date] radio  
1
Chapter  
2
button to sort by date.  
File  
Menu  
The files will be sorted alphabetically if the  
[Name] radio button is selected or by date if  
the [Date] radio button is selected.  
• When sort is complete, selection state of each file  
in the file list and preview image will be cleared.  
n Updating the File List ([Update] button)  
The [Update] button is used to load the file names from the memory card to this software and update the  
file list. If the memory card is replaced while the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is open, be  
sure to click this button to update the file list.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Update] button.  
1
All the file names in the memory card will be  
loadedto the software and a new file list will be  
displayed.  
700  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
n Loading the Selected Data ([Load] button)  
The [Load] button is used to load the data of the selected file from the memory card to the software.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the file you  
want to load.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Load] button.  
A dialog box will appear, allowing you to enter  
the desired element name.  
2
The file name in the memory card will be dis-  
played as an element name.  
Change the element name if necessary,  
and set the parameters.  
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
3
4
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes  
caused by missing data, set the [File Holes] set-  
ting to “On”.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The data of the selected file will be loaded  
and displayed in the element view window.  
The names of the imported elements will also  
appear in the element list, indicating that the  
elements have been selected (highlighted).  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
700  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after the  
software is started, it will be fully framed in all  
the windows including those that are hidden.  
Memo  
A clock icon will be displayed during loading.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Load] Dialog Box  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of the following:  
Reduction Rate  
“1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is “On”, the pro-  
Fill Holes  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the  
Remove  
following: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”,  
None:  
Boundary(B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
Chapter  
2
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15° or 20 °) to the view vector.  
File  
Menu  
Filter  
None:  
The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected  
according to other data.  
n Deleting the Selected File ([Delete] button)  
The [Delete] button is used to delete the selected file from the memory card.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the file you  
want to delete.  
1
Click the [Delete] button.  
A message dialog box will appear.  
2
700  
Click the [Delete] button.  
The file will be deleted.  
3
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
n Deleting All the Files ([Delete All] button)  
The [Delete All] button is used to delete all the files from the memory card..  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
Click the [Delete All] button.  
A message dialog box will appear.  
1
Chapter  
2
Click the [Delete All] button.  
All the files in the memory card will be deleted.  
2
File  
Menu  
Note  
All the files in the memory card will be deleted, irrespec-  
tive of whether or not they are currently selected in the  
file list.  
n Saving the Selected File ([Copy] button)  
The [Delete All] button is used to delete all the files from the memory card..  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed.  
From the file list, select the file you  
want to copy.  
1
Click the [Copy] button.  
2
The [PC Card-Copy] dialog box will appear.  
The copy destination directory and names of  
the files present in that directory will be dis-  
played.  
Change the directory and file name if  
necessary.  
700  
3
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
Click the [Save] button.  
The file will be saved as camera data.  
4
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
n Saving All the Files ([Copy All] button)  
The [Copy All] button is used to copy the data of all the files from the memory card and save them as  
camera data.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed..  
Click the [Copy All] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Copy] dia-  
log box will appear.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
The copy destination directory will be dis-  
played.  
Change the directory if necessary.  
2
3
Click the [Copy All] button.  
All the files will be saved as camera data.  
• If a file(s) having the same name exists, a mes-  
sage dialog box will appear.  
• Clicking the [Overwrite] button will overwrite  
the file which is currently displayed in the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
• Clicking the [Overwrite All] button will over-  
write the file which is currently displayed in the  
message dialog box as well as all the remaining  
files having the same names at once. The mes-  
sage dialog box will not be displayed for those  
remaining files.  
700  
• Clicking the [Skip] button will ignore the file  
displayed in the dialog box and proceed to the  
next file on the file list.  
• Clicking the [Cancel] button will close the dia-  
log box without saving all the remaining files  
(including the one displayed in the dialog box).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PC Card (When VIVID 700 is Selected)  
n Changing the Selected File Name ([Rename] button)  
The [Rename] button is used to change the name of the file selected from the memory card.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box is  
displayed..  
From the file list, select the name of the  
file you want to change.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Rename] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-PC Card-Rename]  
dialog box will appear.  
2
Enter the new name and click the [Re-  
name] button.  
The file name will be changed.  
3
Note  
Names of the files stored in the memory card must con-  
sist of up to eight characters. Only alphabets, numeri-  
cal numbers, bars “–” and underbars “_” can be used.  
Lower-case characters contained in file names will be  
converted to upper-case characters.  
700  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 300 is Selected)  
Performing One Scan with the VIVID 300  
This command is used to cause the VIVID 300 (VI-300) to scan the object one scan at a time using the remote  
control function of this software.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Memo  
Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Operating Procedure  
• The color monitor image currently captured by  
the VIVID 300 will appear in the “Color” area of  
the dialog box. (No color image will appear if the  
[Auto read] checkbox is unchecked even if the  
[Option] checkbox is checked.)  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
1
[Digitizer] and then [One Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
Set an object in place.  
2
Set optional parameters.  
Check the [Option] checkbox, and make nec-  
essary parameters.  
• To set the scan reference position (Distance) and  
laser intensity (Laser Intensity), perform the fol-  
lowing procedure.  
3
qCheck the [Option] checkbox.  
300  
wCheck the [Manual] checkbox.  
eMove the Distance bar or Laser Intensity bar to  
the desired position.  
• If you are not going to scan both color and range  
images at the same time, uncheck the [Auto read]  
checkbox.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 300 is Selected)  
Click the [Scan] button.  
Scan will start, and both color and range im-  
ages will be displayed.  
4
• If the color and range images are not scanned at  
the same time, clicking the [Read] button will  
capture a color image and display it.  
• To restart scan, repeat steps 2 to 3.  
Click the [Convert] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Convert]  
dialog box will appear.  
5
6
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
Note  
The element name must consist of up to 31 alphanu-  
meric characters.  
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes caused  
by missing data, set the [File Holes] setting to “On”.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
• To save the raw scan data (.cam) when importing  
data, check the [Save camera data] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
7
• If the [Save camera data] checkbox was checked at  
step 7, the [Remote-Save] dialog box will appear.  
qEnter the desired file name.  
The scanned image will be displayed. The  
names of the imported elements will also  
appear in the element list, indicating that the  
elements have been selected (highlighted).  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
300  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after  
the software is started, it will be fully framed in  
all the windows including those that are hidden  
automatically.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 300 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan] Dialog Box  
Causes the VIVID 300 (VI-300) to acquire a shot.  
Scan  
If this checkbox is checked, the lower section of the [Digitizer-One Scan] dialog box will be  
active, allowing you to set various parameters including [Distance], [Laser Intensity] and [Auto  
read].  
Option  
If this checkbox is checked, the [Distance] and [Laser Intensity] parameters can be set.  
Used to set VIVID’s scan reference position.  
Manual  
Distance  
Used to set the laser beam intensity of the VIVID.  
Laser Intensity  
Auto read  
If this checkbox is checked, a color image will be read automatically when the dialog box is  
opened. Even if the [Read] button is not clicked after the [Scan] button is clicked, the data will be  
read automatically after images are acquired, and the color image and range image will be dis-  
played in the dialog box. If there is no check mark in the [Option] checkbox, for instance when the  
software is just started up, the [Auto read] checkbox will be checked automatically.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Clicking this button while there is no check mark in the [Auto read] checkbox will read data from  
the instrument and display the range image and the latest color image that were acquired when  
the [Scan] button was clicked last time in the dialog box. This button is effective only if the [Auto  
read] checkbox is unchecked.  
Read  
Sets the focus lock. The [Manual] checkbox will be checked automatically, and the current posi-  
tion and Laser Intensity will be displayed.  
Focus Lock  
Convert  
Causes the [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Convert] dialog box to appear, allowing import of the  
camera data to this software.  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-One Scan-Convert] Dialog Box  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of the follow-  
Reduction Rate  
ing: “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is “On”, the pro-  
Fill Holes  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from an of the  
Remove  
following: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
None:  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
Boundary(B.): The program removes boundary points.  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15°, or 20 °) to the view vector.  
Filter  
None:  
The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected ac-  
cording to other data.  
Save the images as camera data.  
Save camera data  
300  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 300 is Selected)  
Performing Step Scan with the VIVID 300  
This command is used to take two or more shots using the optional rotating stage via the remote control func-  
tion of this software. If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turntable, rotation of the stage can also be  
controlled.  
After the necessary shots are taken, scan the calibration chart. Data acquired from different angles will be  
subjected to registration, and the resulting data will appear.  
Warning  
Never stare into the laser emitting window.  
Do not place a lens, mirror or optical element in the passage of the laser beam. Doing so may converge the  
laser beam, resulting in damage to your eyes, burns or fire. To prevent the above accidents, make sure that a  
wall or similar which can block the laser beam is located behind the object.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Note  
Memo  
If the rotating stage does not operate correctly from the  
dialog box, turn OFF the stage, turn it ON again, and  
then try to operate it.  
• The calibration chart is an accessory of the rotating  
stage set.  
• Before performing the procedure below, make sure that  
the digitizer you are going to use is selected by the File  
– Select Digitizer command.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Select Digitizer command,  
refer to page 144.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import],  
• The color monitor image currently captured by  
the VIVID 300 will appear in the “Color” area of  
the dialog box. (No color image will appear if the  
[Auto read] checkbox is unchecked even if the  
[Option] checkbox is checked.)  
1
[Digitizer] and then [Step Scan].  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] dialog  
box will appear.  
Place the object on the rotating stage.  
2
Select the desired rotation step from  
3
“90”, “60” and “Other”. The rotating  
stage will rotate at the selected step.  
If “Other” is selected, enter the desired rota-  
tion angle.  
300  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 300 is Selected)  
Set optional parameters.  
Check the [Option] checkbox, and make nec-  
essary parameters.  
4
• To set the scan reference position (Distance) and  
laser intensity (Laser Intensity), perform the fol-  
lowing procedure.  
qCheck the [Option] checkbox.  
wCheck the [Manual] checkbox.  
eMove the [Distance] bar or [Laser Intensity]  
bar to the desired position.  
• If you are not going to scan both color and range  
images at the same time, uncheck the [Auto read]  
checkbox.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Scan] button.  
Scan will start, and both color and range im-  
ages will be displayed.  
The “Next shot? (angle:**)” message dialog  
box will also appear.  
5
6
• If the color and range images are not scanned at  
the same time, clicking the [Read] button will  
capture a color image and display it.  
• If the type of rotating stage has not been desig-  
nated, turn the rotating stage manually to the next  
angle displayed in the “Next shot? (angle:**)”  
message dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The next specified angle will appear in [Current  
Angle], and the object will be scanned for the  
next image.  
• To cancel scan, click the [Cancel] button instead  
of the [OK] button, and repeat steps 4 to 5.  
• If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turn-  
table, the stage will turn to the next angle and  
then the object will be scanned.  
Repeat step 6 until shots from all the  
desired angles are captured.  
7
When shots from all the desired angles are  
captured, the “Next shot? Please set the  
chart.” message dialog box will appear.  
• If you want to acquire a shot from a certain angle  
again, click the angle currently displayed in [Cur-  
rent Angle] with the left mouse button, then select  
the desired angle from the pull-down menu that  
appears.  
300  
Memo  
If an angle (rotation step) has been selected at step 3,  
necessary steps (angles) to complete 360 degrees will  
be displayed in the pull-down menu. However, it is not  
necessary to scan at all the angles. You can select neces-  
sary steps (angles) only.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 300 is Selected)  
Place the calibration chart on the rotat-  
ing stage.  
8
Position the chart with the black line facing the  
instrument and place it on the rotating stage  
so that both entire side surfaces are observed  
in the viewfinder.  
• If “Chart” is not displayed in [Current Angle],  
click the left mouse button and select “Chart”  
from the pull-down menu that appears.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
The calibration chart can be scanned at any angle of the  
rotating stage.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The calibration chart will be scanned.  
9
Good example  
Bad example  
Note  
Make sure that the acquired range image looks like  
the good example given below. If it resembles the bad  
example, click the [Scan] button again to re-scan the  
calibration chart.  
Click the [Convert] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert]  
dialog box will appear.  
10  
300  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 300 is Selected)  
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
11  
• Select the desired rate from “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”,  
“1/16” and “No polygon” by selecting from the  
[Reduction Rate] pull-down menu.  
Note  
• If you want to generate points to fill in holes caused  
by missing data, set the [File Holes] setting to “On”.  
• The [Remove] pull-down menu lets you select  
which points to remove from the imported data.  
You can set this to any of the following: “None”,  
“Boundary(B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”,  
“15deg. & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
The element name must consist of up to 31 characters.  
• If you want to filter the imported data, select the  
appropriate parameter from the [Filter] pull-down  
menu.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• To save the raw scan data (.cam) when importing  
data, check the [Save camera data] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
12  
Each scanned image will be subjected to reg-  
istration and displayed, and the “Proceed to  
registration?” message dialog box will appear.  
The element list will also show the element  
name specified at step 11 plus “rotation step”.  
The element name is highlighted, indicating  
that it is currently selected.  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
at step 11, the [Remote-Save] dialog box will ap-  
pear before the one that asks whether you want to  
perform fine-registration.  
qEnter the desired file name.  
• When the data is loaded for the first time after  
the software is started, it will be fully framed in  
all the windows including those that are hidden  
automatically.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
• If a rotating stage has been designated, the rotat-  
ing stage will rotate back to the original position  
before data reading starts.  
• If the [Save camera data] checkbox was checked  
300  
Click the [OK] button.  
• If you are not going to perform fine-registration,  
click the [Cancel] button instead of the [OK] but-  
ton.  
13  
Fine-registration of the element position will  
be performed and the data will be displayed  
again.  
• If a rotating stage has been selected by the Turn-  
table, the stage will turn to the next angle and  
then scan will be performed.  
Memo  
Fine-registration can be cancelled even if it has started, by  
clicking the [Cancel] button in the dialog box that appears  
during fine-registration.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Step Scan (When VIVID 300 is Selected)  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan] Dialog Box  
Used to set the serial port and rotating stage type to be used for remote operation.  
Turntable  
Note  
If connecting to a SKIDS-60YAW unit, select “CSG-602R(Ver.1.0)” from the pull-down menu.  
If connecting to a SKIDS-60YAW (Ver. 2.0) unit, select “CSG-602R(Ver.2.0)”.  
Used to select the desired angle (degree) of the rotating stage from “90”, “60” and “Other”. If  
“Other” is selected, enter the desired rotation step..  
Rotation step  
Current Angle  
Used to select the desired scan step (i.e. the angle at which scan is to be performed). “0” will be  
selected first when the dialog box is opened. It is possible to select the desired angle by clicking  
the angle currently displayed in [Current Angle] and selecting the desired angle from the pull-  
down menu that appears. If an angle at which scan has already been performed is selected again  
and the [Scan] button is clicked, the previously acquired image data will be overwritten.  
Chapter  
2
Causes the VIVID 300 (VI-300) to acquire a shot.  
Scan  
File  
Menu  
If this checkbox is checked, the lower section of the [Remote-Step Scan] dialog box will be active,  
allowing you to set various parameters including [Distance], [Laser Intensity] and [Auto read].  
Option  
If this checkbox is checked, the [Distance] and [Laser Intensity] parameters can be set.  
Used to set the VIVID’s scan reference position.  
Manual  
Distance  
Used to set the laser beam intensity of the VIVID.  
Laser Intensity  
Auto read  
If this checkbox is checked, a color image will be read automatically when the dialog box is  
opened. Even if the [Read] button is not clicked after the [Scan] button is clicked, the data will be  
read automatically after images are acquired, and the color image and range image will be dis-  
played in the dialog box. If there is no check mark in the [Option] checkbox, for instance when the  
software is just started up, the [Auto read] checkbox will be checked automatically.  
Clicking this button while there is no check mark in the [Auto read] checkbox will read data from  
the instrument and display the range image and the latest color image that were acquired when  
the [Scan] button was clicked last time in the dialog box. This button is effective only if the [Auto  
read] checkbox is unchecked.  
Read  
Sets the focus lock. The [Manual] checkbox will be checked automatically, and the current posi-  
Focus Lock  
Convert  
tion and Laser Intensity will be displayed.  
Causes the [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert] dialog box to appear, allowing import of the  
camera data to this software.  
Parameters for [File-Import-Digitizer-Step Scan-Convert] Dialog Box  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing the data. You can select any of  
Reduction Rate  
the following: “1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the programs fill in holes when importing the data. If the setting is “On”,  
the program will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Fill Holes  
Selects which the data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from  
an of the following: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg. & B.”, “15deg. &B.”, or  
“20deg. & B.”  
Remove  
None:  
Boundary(B.):  
Removal is not carried out when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
300  
5deg. & B.,10deg. & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points, and also removes polygons within the  
specified angular range (5°, 10 °, 15°, or 20 °) to the view vector.  
Filter  
None:  
Removal is not carried out when exporting the data.  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing the data, the points that appear to be noise will be corrected  
according to other data.  
Save the images as camera data.  
Save camera data  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Aligning Multiple Scans (for VIVID 910 only)  
This program allows you to take and align multiple shots (multiple scans) of a single object using a VIVID  
910. You use the program to remotely control the scans, and you attach markers onto the object so that the  
program can correlate the data taken from multiple shots (at multiple angles). The program aligns the data  
based on the markers, and displays the result.  
Memo  
Left : Set marker correspondence  
• This command works only with the VIVID 910.  
Right : Edit/Add marker  
• To use all function of this command, connecting to  
[Ctrl] + Right : Delete marker  
VIVID 910 and the license will be required.  
• Prior preparation (calibration) is required for the  
marker to be automatically recognized.  
Ref.  
For details about the Automatic Marker Recogni-  
tion, refer to page 131.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Operating Procedure  
From the [File] menu, select [Import]  
1
– [Digitizer] and click [Easy Align].  
The program opens the [File-Import-Digitizer-  
Easy Align] dialog and a temporary window.  
• If the VIVID 910 is connected, the monochrome  
monitor image currently captured by the VIVID  
910 will appear in the work window area on the  
left of the dialog box.  
• The very first time you use this command (with  
the VIVID 910 connected), the command begins  
by displaying the [License Failure] dialog box.  
Memo  
If the VIVID 910 is not connected when you first execute  
this command, the [License Failure] dialog box will not  
appear and the program will not check for a license. You  
can continue directly from step 2 below.  
910  
qClick the [OK] button.  
The [File-Import-Digitizer-Easy Align-Li-  
cense] dialog box opens.  
wAt the dialog, enter the license code that cor-  
responds to the displayed VIVID 910 serial  
number, and then click [OK].  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Note  
If you do not enter the correct lisence code, the [Con-  
vert] button will not be enabled. This means that you  
will not be able to make use of the aligned data.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Adhere markers onto the object.  
2
3
Memo  
Note that some objects have delicate surfaces that may  
be damaged when markers are peeled off after use. In  
particular, the markers we provide have fairly strong ad-  
hesive and will become difficult to peel off if left attached  
for more than 24 hours.  
Adjust the position of the object and  
move the VIVID 910 forward or back so  
that the object appears at the middle of  
the image area at the appropriate view  
angle.  
Click the [Scan Mode] tab, and set the  
scan mode to either Fine or Fast.  
4
5
If you are using a turntable, click the  
[Turntable] tab and set the serial port,  
the rotating stage type, and the rotation  
angle.  
Set other parameters as necessary.  
6
910  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Click the [Scan] button.  
7
The program takes the scan and displays the  
resulting color image in the work window area  
on the left of the dialog. It also automatically  
detects the markers, and displays a single  
character (0 to 9 or A to Y) for each “marker  
ID” (0 to 34) in each location at which a marker  
was detected.  
If the program determines that the scanned  
data is good enough for alignment processing,  
the condition bar (under the work window) be-  
comes blue and displays the “Good condition”  
message. If the program determines that the  
scan results are not good enough for align-  
ment, the condition bar turns red and displays  
“No good”.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Memo  
On the color image, areas that have no distance data are  
displayed as black.  
• When [Auto Marker Detection] checkbox is un-  
checked, the automatic marker detection will not  
be carried out.  
• As an alternative to taking the scan at this time,  
you can import a saved scan (CDM file) that was  
previously taken with the VIVID 910. Just click  
the [Import] button and load the appropriate file.  
If necessary, adjust the marker corre-  
spondences.  
8
• If any of the detected marker IDs does not match  
the corresponding marker on the actual object,  
correct as follows: right-click the marker ID on  
the image, and then enter the correct marker ID at  
the dialog that opens.  
Note  
If the condition bar (under the work window) is red, this  
means that the data is not yet suitable for alignment.  
Adjust the marker correspondences and take other steps  
as necessary until the bar becomes blue.  
• If any of the marker IDs displayed on the previ-  
ously stored image (the image stored at step 9 be-  
low) does not match the corresponding marker ID  
displayed on the image scanned at step 7 above,  
correct as follows: Left-click the mismatched ID  
in either of these two images, and then left-click  
on the correct corresponding marker ID in the  
other image. The program will change the IDs so  
that they are identical.  
910  
• To set up a “new” marker ID on images from  
Step 7 on Step 9 in a location where there was  
no physical marker on the object (or where the  
program failed to detect a marker), left-click the  
corresponding points in the two images. The  
program will display a marker ID of “*” at these  
points.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Click the [Store] button.  
9
The data displayed in the work window moves  
over into the store window on the right side of  
the dialog.  
Marker detection results are indicated in the  
condition bar. The temporary window shows a  
preliminary  
converted image (“pre-converted” image) of all  
of the stored data.  
Chapter  
2
Repeat steps 7 to 9 as necessary to  
scan at all desired angles.  
10  
11  
File  
Menu  
• You can use the [<<Prev] button or [Next>>] but-  
ton to move through the stored-data displays.  
• You can use the [Delete] button to delete unnec-  
essary stored data.  
• You can use the [View] button to move through  
the data display or hiding in the temporary win-  
dow.  
If you have adjusted the marker cor-  
respondences, click the [Pre-Convert]  
button.  
The image displayed in the store window area  
(on the right of the dialog box) is realigned  
based on the change in the marker correspon-  
dence, and the result appears in the temporary  
window.  
Click the [Convert] button.  
The program opens the [File-Import-Digitizer-  
Easy Align-Convert] dialog.  
12  
• If you did not enter a valid license code at Step 1  
above, the [Convert] button will not appear.  
910  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Enter an element name and set the ele-  
ment parameters.  
1
3
• Select the data resolution from the [Reduction  
Rate] pull-down menu. Choices are: “1/1”, “1/4”,  
“1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Note  
• If you want the program to fill-in lost data areas  
when loading the data, set [Fill Holes] to “On”.  
• At the [Remove] pull-down menu, select the  
data to be excluded at time of loading. Choices  
are: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg.& B.”,  
“10deg.& B.”, “15deg.& B.”, and “20deg.& B.”  
• If you want to filter the data when loading it,  
make the appropriate selection at the [Filter] pull-  
down menu.  
Enter an element name of up to 31 alphanumeric char-  
acters.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
• If you want to apply 3D processing to the marker  
sections, make the appropriate selection at the  
[Marker Correction] pull-down menu.  
• If you want to use texturing, check the [Use Tex-  
ture] checkbox.  
• If you want to save the data at the time of conver-  
sion, check the [Save Data] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
14  
The temporary window (the window that was  
showing the pre-converted image) closes. The  
program converts the data that was displayed  
in the store window, and displays the resulting  
aligned data.  
• The loaded data will be ready for display in all  
windows. It will be shown in the active window  
and in those windows for which all elements are  
set to be displayed (i.e., in those windows that are  
not set to “Selective”).  
• If you checked [Save Data] (at Step 13 above),  
the program opens the [Easy Align-Save] dialog  
box (shown above).  
• The first time the program loads data after starting  
up, it will be fully framed in all windows (includ-  
ing those that are hidden automatically).  
• If you are using the rotating stage, the stage now  
rotates back to its origin.  
qEnter a filename for the saved file.  
wClick the [Save] button.  
Note  
• For elements that existed prior to execution of  
this command, the selection status and display  
states remain unchanged.  
The filename must be alphanumeric characters only.  
910  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
n Calibration to Facilitate Automatic Marker Recognition  
In the Easy Align, position alignment is carried  
out based on the marker information gotten  
from the markers affixed to the object to be  
measured. The program identifies markers  
by color patterns. Under some scan lighting  
conditions, however, the program is unable  
to distinguish the markers correctly. Accord-  
ingly, adjustment is necessary to carry out by  
implementing calibration of the White Balance  
adjustment and Color Chart under the same  
lighting conditions as those used for the actual  
scan in order to get stable and correct marker  
information, as you will use for scanning the  
marked object.  
Memo  
In performing calibration, always be sure to attach the  
same lens that will be used during the actual scan of the  
object to be measured.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
The calibration procedure described below  
generates the reference file. Once the file  
has been created, the program will use it as  
reference when detecting markers from the  
scanned images.  
n VIVID 910 White Balance Adjustment  
Because the Easy Align command must au-  
Memo  
tomatically detect the markers adhered to  
the scanned object, lighting conditions are of  
critical important. This means that it is neces-  
sary to adjust the white balance at the VIVID  
910 unit before using the command, and it is  
important to keep the illumination conditions  
constant during measurements.  
The recommended light source is a daylight-colored  
fluorescent lamp with a brightness that is appropriate for a  
typical office environment (about 500 lux).  
Ref.  
For information about how to carry out white-bal-  
ance adjustment, refer to page 43, in the VIVID 910  
unit’s Instruction Manual.  
Note  
The Easy Align command cannot be used if you are  
working near a window exposed to the midday sun, or if  
you are using a tungsten-color fluorescent light source.  
910  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
n Color Chart Calibration  
Operating Procedure  
To carry out the following procedure, you must first open the [File-Import-Digitizer-Easy Align] dialog.  
Click the [Parameters] tab.  
1
Note  
The [Settings] button will not appear if [Auto Maker  
Detection] is unchecked.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the [Settings] button.  
2
The name of the button changes to [Calibra-  
tion]. It is now possible to change the [Color  
Level].  
Place the supplied color chart same  
position as the object to be scanned.  
Set the lighting to the same conditions you will  
3
use when carrying out the actual scan. Set the  
Color chart  
color chart so that it is directly facing the VIVID  
910 lens.  
Note  
To be sure that you scan only the chart and not any-  
thing else, check the image shown in dialog to confirm  
that you have placed the chart in the right place.  
910  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Click the [Calibration] button.  
4
The program executes calibration. If calibra-  
tion is successful, the “Calibration success.”  
message dialog box will appear.  
• If calibration is not successful, the “Calibration  
failure.” massage dialog box appears. If this hap-  
pens, click the dialog’s [OK] button, and effect  
the measures listed below in accordance with the  
content given in the dialog.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
In the case of that the “Lighting is too bright.”  
message dialog box will appear, the light source  
is too strong, so decrease its intensity.  
In the case of that the “Lighting is too dark.” mes-  
sage dialog box will appear, the light source is too  
dark, so increase its intensity.  
In the case of that the “Chart setting is improper.  
or Light source is improper.” message dialog box  
will appear, either the Color Chart has been im-  
properly set or the light source is unstable. Make  
sure that the Color Chart directly faces the VIVID  
910 and that it fills the screen completely. Also  
check to make sure that the fluorescent light is not  
flickering.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The dialog closes. This completes the calibration.  
5
910  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Parameters in the [File-Import-Digitizer-Easy Align] Dialog  
Lets you import data that was previously scanned by a VIVID 910 and saved as a CDM file.  
Once you have imported the data, you can proceed just as you would when working with an  
actual scan. Note that if you are using saved CDM data from a step-scan, the program will only  
import the data currently shown in the preview. The data that is not in the color image or VIVID  
900 data cannot be imported  
Import  
Executes auto-focus. To manually adjust the distance, exposure, or other settings, open the Gen-  
AF  
eral tab and set as desired. This button is active only if the VIVID 910 is connected.  
Executes scanning. When [Auto Marker Detection] checkbox is checked, the automatic marker  
detection will be carried out. When the [Color Level] checkbox is unchecked at the time of auto-  
matic marker detection, the automatic switching of color levels will be carried out, and there are  
cases when color images are taken multiple times. This button is active only if the VIVID 910 is  
connected.  
Scan  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Retakes a color shot and display the newest picture by clicking this button after scanning.  
This button will be enabled after scanning.  
Color Read  
Auto  
If this checkbox is checked, the program will automatically execute store processing on imported  
or scanned data that is determined to be in “good condition” (i.e., for which the condition bar  
appears blue). When the command starts, this checkbox is empty.  
Registers the scanned data as stored data.  
Store  
Turns display of marker IDs in the work and store windows ON or OFF.  
View marker ID  
Mono/Color/Pitch  
Changes the type of the display in the work window.  
Mono :  
The window displays monochrome monitor data. (It is available only if the VIVID  
910 is connected.)  
Color :  
Pitch :  
The window displays color data.  
The window displays distance data for scanned or imported data.  
Change display to the previous or next stored data by clicking the [Prev] or [Next] button.  
Prev/Next  
Delete  
Deletes the stored data currently shown in the store window. If the program is showing the result  
as an element in the temporary window, this element is also deleted.  
Pre-converts and aligns the stored data, and displays the result in the temporary window.  
Turns the pre-converted element display in the temporary window ON or OFF.  
Pre-Convert  
View  
Converts all stored data in accordance with the specified parameter settings, and displays the  
Convert  
aligned result.  
General Tab  
Distance  
Intensity  
LD  
Checking this checkbox sets [Distance] on.  
Checking this checkbox sets [LD] and [Gain] on.  
Sets the intensity of the laser beam.  
Sets the gain.  
Gain  
Executes focus lock. When you select this item, the program automatically places checks in the  
[Distance] and [Intensity] checkboxes, and displays the current set position, the laserbeam inten-  
sity, and the gain value.  
Focus Lock  
910  
Scan Mode Tab  
Fine/Fast  
Sets the scan mode.  
If this checkbox is checked, the program takes multiple shot so as to expand the dynamic range  
and reduce data loss.  
Dynamic Range  
Expansion  
If this checkbox is checked, the program includes display of low-reliability data. On the range  
image, data for which laser intensity was too high appear in light gray, while data for which  
intensity was too low are shown in dark gray.  
High Quality  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – Easy Align  
Parameters in the [File-Import-Digitizer-Easy Align] Dialog  
Parameters Tab  
Check this checkbox if using markers.  
Auto Maker Detection  
Settings  
When you click this button, the button’s name changes to [Calibration]. You can then change  
the color level and carry out calibration. This button appears only if the [Auto Maker Detection]  
checkbox is checked  
Checking this checkbox sets the program to use color exposure level.  
Color Level  
Calibration  
If this checkbox is checked, the program gets a color image and generates a reference file from  
it. This check box appears only if the [Auto Maker Detection] checkbox is checked.  
If this checkbox is checked, the program applies logarithmic correction to color data. Use if you  
want to brighten up neutral colors. This check box appears only if the [Auto Maker Detection]  
checkbox is unchecked.  
Log  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
If this checkbox is checked, the program applies smoothing to color data. Use if illumination is  
low and the image is unclear. This check box appears only if the [Auto Maker Detection] check-  
box is unchecked.  
Smooth  
Dark  
If this checkbox is checked, the program applies dark correction to color data. Use if you are get-  
ting striation-type noise in the images. This check box appears only if the [Auto Maker Detec-  
tion] checkbox is unchecked.  
Turntable Tab  
Apply  
When you click the [Apply] button after selecting the serial port and rotating stage, the [Angle]  
slidebar becomes effective and stage control is enabled.  
Note  
If connecting to a SKIDS-60YAW unit, select “CSG-602R (Ver.1.0)” from the menu. If connecting to a  
SKIDS-60YAW (Ver.2.0) unit, select “CSG-602R (Ver.2.0)”.  
The Angle slidebar becomes enabled when the program determines that the rotating stage is  
Angle  
operating normally. You can use the slidebar to control the stage’s rotation.  
Parameters in the [File-Import-Digitizer-Easy Align-Convert] Dialog  
Selects the reduction rate to be applied when importing data. You can select any of the following:  
Reduction Rate  
“1/1”, “1/4”, “1/9”, “1/16”, or “No polygon”.  
Selects whether the program fills in holes when importing the data. If the setting is On, the pro-  
Fill Holes  
gram will automatically generate points to fill in holes left by missing data.  
Selects which data the program excludes when carrying out the import. Select from any of the fol-  
Remove  
lowing: “None”, “Boundary (B.)”, “5deg. & B.”, “10deg &B.”, “15deg & B.”, or “20deg. & B.”  
None:  
Boundary (B.):  
No removal when importing the data.  
The program removes boundary points.  
5deg & B., 10deg & B., 15deg. & B., 20deg. & B.:  
The program removes boundary points and also removes polygons within  
the specified angular range (5°,10°, 15°, or 20°) to the view vector.  
Filter  
None:  
The program does not perform filtering when importing the data.  
Noise Filter (N.F.): When importing data, the program corrects the points that appear to be noise.  
High Quality (H.Q.): The program filters out unreliable data. (Effective only when importing  
data that was scanned using the VIVID 910.)  
910  
H.Q & N.F.:  
Applies both noise filter and high quality filter. (Effective only when im-  
porting data that was scanned using the VIVID 910.)  
Marker Correction  
None:  
Cut marker:  
Smooth marker:  
The program does not perform filtering the marker sections.  
The data in the marker section will be deleted and treated as a hole.  
Smoothing will be carried out for the marker section data.  
Check this checkbox when using texture.  
Use Texture  
If you check this checkbox, the program will automatically save the data into a camera data file  
Save Data  
when carrying out conversion.  
Note  
If you select CDM as the file type for the save (at the Save dialog that appears) , the program will not include the  
above-described data corrections and data-coordinate conversion information into the saved file. If you select a  
file type other than CDM, however, the program does incorporate this information into the save.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – PSC-1  
Performing Precision Registration of Scan Data  
This command uses photogrammetry to enable precision registration of data scanned by VIVID 9i, by utiliz-  
ing 3D data that is obtained from the 2D data taken by a digital camera.  
To obtain 3D data from 2D data, the image data taken by a digital camera from different angles is processed  
using software called “PhotoModeler KM”.  
Since this requires some experiences in operation and another software in addition to this Polygon Editing  
Tool software, a separate operation manual has been prepared. For details, refer to the Photogrametry System  
PSC-1 Instruction Manual.  
Memo  
• This command can only be used on the VIVID 9i.  
• To use this command, a license of the Photogrametry  
System PSC-1 is required.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
9i  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Export – Elements  
Exporting Element Data as Various Formats  
This command is used to export the data of the selected elements in various data formats.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the ele-  
ments to be exported.  
1
Memo  
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
From the [File] menu, select [Export]  
and then click [Elements].  
2
The [File-Export-Elements] dialog box will appear.  
• If two or more elements have been selected, their  
names will be displayed in the order they are  
displayed in the element list.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
If you want to change the file name,  
enter a new file name.  
3
4
Note  
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters only.  
From the [File as type] pull-down menu,  
select the desired format.  
The following file types are available.  
• If a format (i.e. VRML1.0, VRML2.0, Softim-  
age) that allows attachment of images is selected,  
the [With Images] checkbox will be effective. If  
you want to attach images to the data, check the  
checkbox.  
• VRML1.0  
• VRML2.0  
• Softimage  
• Wavefront  
• DXF  
• ASCII  
• STL(ascii, binary)  
• MGF  
(*.wrl)  
(*.wrl)  
(*.hrc)  
(*.obj)  
(*.dxf)  
(*.asc)  
(*.stl)  
(*.mgf)  
Click the [Export] button.  
5
Memo  
The first element will be exported, and a dialog  
box for the next element will appear.  
• When all the elements are exported, the dialog  
box will close.  
If “Softimage” has been selected in [Export as type] and  
the [Export] button is clicked, four kinds of files will be  
exported (*.hrc, *.mtr, *.pic, *.txt). (Only “*.hrc” files  
will be exported if the [With Images] checkbox is not  
checked.)  
• If you click the [Cancel] button, the next element  
and subsequent elements will not be exported.  
To used exported data with “Softimage”, store the data  
files in the following directories of the “Softimage”  
database.  
9i  
Note  
910  
If the element data contains two or more images, an error  
message will appear when the [Export] button is clicked  
with “Softimage” selected in [File as type], [With Images]  
checked and [With Merged Image] unchecked.  
• “*.hrc” file - [Models] directory  
• “*.mtr” file - [MATERIALS] directory  
• “*.pic” file - [Pictures] directory  
• “*.txt” file - [TEXTURES2D] directory  
900  
700  
300  
Parameters for [File-Export-Elements] Dialog Box  
Select the folder for exporting data.  
Export in  
Input the name of data file to export.  
File name  
Select format for exporting data.  
File as type  
With Images  
With Merged Image  
Textures will also be output when the data is exported.  
Textures will be merged and output when the data is exported.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Export – Elements  
n Texture Merging  
To merge textures and output the result when the element is exported, follow the procedure given below.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the desired file and output format have been se-  
lectedin the [File-Export-Elements] dialog box.  
Check the [With Images] and then [With  
Merged Image] checkbox in this order.  
1
Chapter  
2
Note  
File  
Menu  
If two or more elements have been selected, it is not pos-  
sible to check the [With Merged Image] checkbox (the  
checkbox will be ineffective).  
Click the [Export] button.  
2
The [File-Export-Elements] dialog box will  
close, and the dialog box shown on the right  
will appear instead.  
• The loaded data will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed in the active  
window and the windows for which all the ele-  
ments are set to be displayed.  
• The unselected elements which have been dis-  
played when this command is executed will be hid-  
den in all windows. The elements that have been  
hidden will be displayed when the menu is exited.  
• A projection plane will be displayed in each  
window in such a way that it encloses the element  
(default projection plane: Cylindolical). The axis  
of the projection plane is indicated in red, the  
green end of the axis indicates the top side of the  
projection plane and the blue end indicates the  
bottom side. In addition, disconnections of tex-  
tures are indicated by purple lines.  
Select the desired projection and move  
or rotate it.  
3
• To fit the projection to the shape of the element,  
click the [Fit] button.  
Dragging with the left mouse button will rotate  
the projection’s axis, and dragging with the left  
mouse button while holding down the [Shift]  
button will rotate the projection around the axis.  
• Changing the “projection” type will cause the  
projection displayed inside the window to change  
to the selected type. The projection will be dis-  
played so that it encloses the element.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Note  
It is possible to change view mode for the element view  
window, but not to close the element view window.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Export – Elements  
Set the size and background color.  
4
5
• Clicking [Background color] with the left mouse  
button will open a color palette, allowing you to  
set the desired background color.  
• Width and Height must be set within the range of  
“0” and “10000”. An error message will appear if  
they are outside the range.  
Click the [Preview] button.  
All the element view windows will be hidden, and  
the image and preview windows will appear.  
• The image window shows the color image pro-  
jected on the projection plane.  
Chapter  
2
• Clicking the [Preview Close] button will close the  
image and preview windows and display all the  
element view windows.  
File  
Menu  
• The preview window shows the texture-mapped  
element in full frame. Dragging with the left  
mouse button inside the preview window rotates  
the camera.  
The [Preview Close] button will change to the  
[Preview] button.  
• If the image and preview windows are closed, the  
[Preview Close] button will change to the [Pre-  
view] button.  
• The [Preview] button in the [File-Export-Element],  
will change to the [Preview Close] button and also a  
name of the dialog box will change to [Merge Texture].  
In the [Merge Texture] dialog box, buttons except  
[OK], [Preview Close] and [Cancel] buttons will  
be ineffective.  
All the element view windows will be displayed.  
Note  
• It is not possible to rotate/move the projection plane  
inside the preview window.  
• Shortcut keys cannot be used while the preview win-  
dow is active.  
• It is not possible to change view mode for the element  
view window.  
Click the [OK] button.  
6
• Clicking the [Cancel] button will cancel all the  
operations that have been performed after the  
[Merge Texture] dialog box was opened.  
If the image window and preview window are  
open, they will be closed and all the element view  
windows will open instead.  
The element containing the color image pro-  
jected on the projection plane will be exported  
in the specified format.  
• When the element has been exported, the [Merge  
Texture] dialog box will close.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
If the image window and temporary window are  
open, they will be closed and all the element view  
windows will open instead.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Export – Images  
Exporting Image Data as Various Formats  
This command is used to export the color image data of the selected elements in various data formats.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the ele-  
ments to be exported.  
1
Memo  
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
From the [File] menu, select [Export]  
and then click [Images].  
The [File-Export-Images] dialog box will ap-  
2
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
pear.  
If two or more elements have been selected,  
their names will be displayed in the order they  
are displayed in the element list.  
If you want to change the file name,  
enter a new file name.  
Note  
3
The file name must consist of alphanumeric characters  
only.  
From the “File as type” pull-down  
4
menu, select the desired format.  
The following image data file types are avail-  
able.  
• TIFF  
(*.tif)  
• BMP  
(*.bmp)  
(*.ppm)  
(*.jpg)  
• PPM/PGM  
• JPEG  
Click the [Export] button.  
5
The first element will be exported, and a dialog  
box for the next element will appear.  
When all the elements are exported, the dialog  
box will close.  
If you click the [Cancel] button, the next ele-  
ment and subsequent elements will not be  
exported.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Parameters for [File-Export-Images] Dialog Box  
Select the folder for exporting data.  
Export in  
Input the name of data file to export.  
File name  
File as type  
Select format for exporting data.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Remove Elements  
Removing the Selected Element(s)  
This command is used to remove element(s) selected in the element list.  
Memo  
The File – Remove Elements command has the same  
functions as the Edit – Delete – Elements command.  
Ref.  
For details of the Edit – Delete – Elements com-  
mand, refer to page 169.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the ele-  
ment to be removed.  
1
Memo  
Chapter  
2
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
File  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
Menu  
Click [Remove Elements] on the [File]  
menu.  
A message dialog box asking you whether to  
2
delete all the selected elements will appear.  
Click the [OK] button.  
All the selected elements and their corre-  
sponding points will be removed.  
3
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Preferences  
Displaying Information for Setting Conditions  
This command is used to display information related to various settings.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Preferences] on the [File] menu.  
The [File-Preferences] dialog box will appear,  
showing the setting conditions.  
1
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Click the desired tab and make the de-  
sired setting for each parameter.  
2
Click the [OK] button.  
The dialog box will close and the settings  
made at step 2 will be saved.  
3
Memo  
Clicking the [OK] button will effectuate all the changes  
made in the [General] and [Attribute] tabs immediately.  
The settings made in the [Default Behavior] tab will be  
saved, and will be effective when this software is started  
next time.  
Note  
If the Undo number is reduced, the old information  
corresponding to the amount of reduction will be deleted  
and cannot be restored.  
Parameters for [General] Tab of [File-Preference] Dialog Box  
Default Settings  
Used to set the default directory in which data is to be saved. When  
you specify the default directory or click the [Browse] button, a  
Directory from which  
the software is started  
Data dir.  
9i  
dialog box allowing you to select a directory will appear, so select the  
desired default directory.  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Used to set the number of times Undo is to be performed (1 to 20).  
5
2
Undo  
Move the slide bar to set.  
Used to set the number of point coordinate digits to be displayed. The  
setting made here will be reflected for ASCII output, Info – Points  
and Info –Picked Point, that can be set when File – Export – Elements  
is selected.  
Decimal Digits  
Used to set the type of mouse to be used (3 buttons or 2 buttons). The  
status bar will vary with the number of buttons.  
3 buttons  
Mouse  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Preferences  
Parameters for [Attribute] Tab of [File-Preference] Dialog Box  
Wireframe  
Default Settings  
Used to set the wireframe color of the currently selected elements.  
Pink  
Selected  
Unselected  
Line width  
Shading  
Used to set the wireframe color of the currently unselected elements.  
Dark gray  
Used to set the wireframe line width (0~10).  
1
Used to set the shading color of the currently selected elements.  
But note that if you have checked the [Auto] checkbox, the program  
will automatically set the shading color for each element using a  
prearranged color scheme.  
Dark green  
Dark gray  
Selected  
Used to set the shading color of the currently unselected elements.  
Unselected  
Vertex  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Used to set the color and size of the currently selected points.  
Used to set the color and size of the currently unselected points.  
Used to set the color and size of auxiliary points  
Red, Size: 2  
Blue, Size: 2  
White, Size: 2  
Selected  
Unselected  
Auxiliary  
Normal  
Used to set the color and size of the normal.  
Used to set the window’s background color.  
Green  
Color  
Size: 10  
Window  
Background Color  
Memo  
• To set a color, click the color button and select the desired color from the dialog box that appears. Point and line sizes must be  
set numerically.  
• The selected and unselected colors will be hidden if the size of “Selected Color” and “Unselected Color” for [Vertex] is set to  
“0”, respectively.  
• If you set the wireframe line width to “0”, the display will show points only-and if you are using LOD at the same time, then  
no data at all will appear. If setting the line width to “0”, therefore, please also sure to set the [Use LOD] setting to “Off”.  
Parameters for [Default Behavior] Tab of [File-Preference] Dialog Box  
Default Settings  
Selects whether the program displays unselected elements in simpli-  
On  
Simplify unselected  
elements  
fied form (On) or in detailed form (Off).  
Effective when loading camera data. If the setting is On, the program  
moves input elements to the origin. If the setting is Off, the program  
displays the elements at their original input coordinates.  
Off  
Move input elements  
to origin  
If this setting is On, the program sets the all input elements into  
selected state when loading the data.  
Off  
On  
Select points of  
input elements  
Selects the window display mode used when the program starts up. If  
this setting is On, the program starts up using CAD views. If this set-  
ting is Off, the program starts up using single-window (isometric) view.  
Use CAD views as  
initial windows  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Sets display of points to On or Off.  
Off  
Show points  
Show normals  
Show axis  
Sets display of normals to On or Off.  
Off  
Sets axis display to On or Off.  
On  
Selects the shading condition, flat shading (On) or smooth shading (Off).  
Sets the default rendering mode.  
Off  
Flat shading  
Rendering mode  
Use LOD  
Shading  
Off  
Selects whether the program shows simplified display (On) or de-  
tailed display (Off) during editing of elements. Also sets the level  
between 1 and 100%.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Select Digitizer  
Selecting a Digitizer  
This command is used to select the VIVID connected to the computer from the digitizer list.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Select Digitizer] on the [File]  
menu.  
The [File-Select Digitizer] dialog box will ap-  
pear, showing the currently selected digitizer.  
1
Memo  
After installed this software, the dialog box shows  
“None” until selecting the File-Select Digitizer com-  
mand.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Select the digitizer you want to use, and  
click the [OK] button.  
2
Memo  
The selected digitizer can be controlled via the  
menus that appear when File – Import – Digi-  
tizer commands will be selected.  
If a digitizer has already been selected and you switch it  
to another digitizer, the new digitizer will be usable when  
this software is started next time.  
VIVID 9i (VI-9i)  
Select to use the “VIVID 9i (VI-9i)”  
digitizer.  
VIVID 910 (VI-910)  
Select to use “VIVID 910 (VI-910)”  
digitizer with the new GUI like the one for  
“VIVID 9i (VI-9i)” digitizer.  
VIVID 900/910  
(VI-900/910)  
Select to use the “VIVID 900 (VI-900)” or  
“VIVID 910 (VI-910)” digitizer.  
*
When using 2 or more “VIVID 910 (VI-910)”  
digitizers, select this item.  
VIVID 700 (VI-700)  
VIVID 300 (VI-300)  
TS-1000  
Select to use the “VIVID 700 (VI-700)”  
digitizer.  
Select to use the “VIVID 300 (VI-300)”  
digitizer.  
Select to use the “TS-1000” digitizer.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Exit  
Exiting the Polygon Editing Tool  
[Ctrl] + [Q]  
This command is used to exit the Polygon Editing Tool.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Exit] on the [File] menu.  
The software will be exited.  
1
• If modifications have been made to an element  
after it has been imported or saved, the “Some el-  
ements are modified. Do you want to save them?”  
message dialog box will appear.  
• To save the element data, click the [Yes] button.  
• Clicking the [No] button will exit the software  
without saving the element data.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
Ref.  
For details of how to save elements, refer to the File  
– Save – Elements command (page 26).  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
File  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File – Import – Digitizer – One Scan (When VIVID 9i is Selected)  
View Menu  
Chapter  
2
View  
Menu  
Orbit ………………………………………………………………………………… 148  
Zoom ………………………………………………………………………………… 149  
Full Frame All………………………………………………………………………… 150  
Full Frame …………………………………………………………………………… 150  
Area Orbit …………………………………………………………………………… 151  
Area Zoom …………………………………………………………………………… 152  
Move Plane …………………………………………………………………………… 153  
Move Light …………………………………………………………………………… 154  
Camera Settings ……………………………………………………………………… 155  
Image ………………………………………………………………………………… 156  
Show Element List/Hide Element List ……………………………………………… 156  
Show Toolbar ………………………………………………………………………… 156  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Orbit  
[O] (Effective while held down)  
Rotating / moving camera (view point) position  
This command is used to rotate the camera at the point of interest. In addition, camera position can also be  
moved (dragged).  
Memo  
Use of a mouse equipped with wheel function enables screen zoom-in/-out by turning the wheel.  
Note  
• This command is effective only for the “Isometric” or “Perspective” element view window.  
• View – Orbit mode will be active when this command is selected. To cancel the View – Orbit mode, execute the View – Orbit  
command again. However, if you are executing this command using the shortcut key, the View – Orbit mode can be can-  
celed by releasing the key.  
Left  
: Rotates the camera in the desired direction.  
Chapter  
2
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : -  
Right  
: Moves the camera position (Drags Camera).  
* Enables screen zoom-in/-out by turning the wheel.  
View  
Menu  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Orbit] on the [View] menu.  
1
2
Drag the item in an element view win-  
dow while holding down the left mouse  
button.  
• Camera position can be moved while holding  
down the right mouse button and dragging. Use  
of a mouse equipped with wheel function enables  
screen zoom-in/-out by turning the wheel.  
• Dragging while holding down the right button  
will move the camera position.  
The element will rotate in the direction it is  
dragged.  
Memo  
Element will be displayed in simple form while camera  
position is moved (dragged). It will be displayed in de-  
tailed form when dragging is canceled.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Zoom  
Enlarging/Reducing the Displayed Item  
[Z] (Effective while held down)  
This command is used to enlarge (zoom-in) or reduce (zoom-out) the displayed item, or to move the camera to  
change the view angle.  
Ref.  
Note  
For a description of camera position, refer to the View – Camera Settings command (page 155).  
View – Zoom mode will be active when this command is selected. To cancel the View – Zoom mode, execute the View  
– Zoom command again. However, if you are executing this command using the shortcut key, the View – Zoom mode  
can be canceled by releasing the key.  
Left  
: zoom-in, zoom-out  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: Drags the camera.  
Chapter  
2
View  
Operating Procedure  
Menu  
Click [Zoom] on the [View] menu.  
1
Drag the item in an element view win-  
dow while holding down the left mouse  
button.  
2
• To move the camera (i.e. drag the camera), drag  
while holding down the right mouse button.  
Dragging the item upward will enlarge it  
(zoom-in) and dragging it downward will re-  
duce it (zoom-out).  
Memo  
The element will be displayed in simple form during  
zoom and drag. It will be displayed in detailed form when  
zooming or dragging is canceled.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Full Frame All  
Displaying Data Fully in all Windows  
[Shift] + [F]  
This command is used to fully frame the data completely in each element view window.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Full Frame All] on the [View]  
menu.  
1
The currently displayed elements will be  
zoomed in so that they are fully framed in their  
corresponding windows.  
Chapter  
2
View  
Menu  
View – Full Frame  
Displaying Data Fully in Active Windows  
[F]  
This command is used to fully frame the data displayed in the active window.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Full Frame] on the [View] menu.  
1
The element currently displayed in the active  
window will be zoomed in so that it is fully  
framed.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Area Orbit  
[W] (Effective while held down)  
Rotating the Camera and Setting the Rotation Center  
Use this command to set the camera’s rotation center point, and to rotate the camera in any direction.  
Ref.  
Note  
To find the camera’s current position and point-of-interest, use the View – Camera Settings command (page 155).  
This command is effective in element view windows whose view direction is set to Isometric or Perspective.  
Left  
: Rotates the camera in any direction  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: Sets the center of rotation.  
Operating Procedure  
Chapter  
2
Open the [View] menu and click [Area  
Orbit].  
1
View  
Menu  
Hold down the left mouse button, and  
2
drag the element (in the element view  
window) to rotate it about its center.  
Dragging left or right rotates the element hori-  
zontally, while dragging up or down rotates it  
vertically.  
• The image rotates around the center point that  
you select by right-clicking on the element view  
window.  
Memo  
The program automatically switches to simplified element  
display while the camera is in motion. When you finish  
dragging, the program displays from the new camera  
position using the originally selected display type.  
Press the [ESC] key.  
View–Area Orbit mode will be canceled.  
3
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Area Zoom  
[X] (Effective while held down)  
Enlarging/Reducing Item Enclosed by Specified Rectangle  
This command is used to enlarge (zoom-in) the item enclosed by a rectangle or reduce (zoom-out) the cur-  
rently displayed item so that it is displayed within the rectangle, by defining a rectangle to be used as a scale  
on the element view window.  
Left  
: zoom-in  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: zoom-out  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Area Zoom] on the [View] menu.  
1
Chapter  
2
View  
Menu  
Locate the mouse pointer to the start  
2
point of the desired area (rectangle),  
drag it, then release the mouse button  
at the end point.  
The rectangle to be used as a scale will be  
defined. Dragging while holding down the left  
mouse button will enlarge the item, and drag-  
ging while holding down the right button will  
reduce it.  
Press the [ESC] key.  
View – Area Zoom mode will be canceled.  
3
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Move Plane  
Setting Display Depth  
[A] (Effective while held down)  
This command is used to set the display depth by changing the position (Near Plane) where the target element  
starts to appear and the position (Far Plane) where it starts to disappear.  
Left  
: Near Plane  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : Near Plane/Far Plane  
Right  
: Far Plane  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Move Plane] on the [View] menu.  
1
2
Chapter  
2
View  
Menu  
Click the point on the element where  
you want to set the display range.  
• If you click with the left mouse button, the Near  
Plane will be set on the point you clicked. If you  
click with the right mouse button, the Far Plane  
will be set on the point you clicked.  
• If you click with the middle mouse button ([Shift]  
+ Left), the Near Plane/Far Plane (fixed depth)  
will be centered on the point you clicked.  
To move the plane, drag it.  
3
4
• If you drag with the mouse left button pressed,  
the Near Plane will move. If you drag with the  
mouse right button pressed, the Far Plane will  
move.  
If you drag with the middle mouse button ([Shift]  
+ Left) pressed, the Near Plane/Far Plane (fixed  
depth) will move.  
Press the [ESC] key.  
View-Move Plane mode will be canceled.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Move Light  
Moving the Light  
This command is used to move the light, for instance when the element is displayed in shading mode.  
Memo  
• The light is a pseudo light designed to produce a shadow when the element view window is in shading mode.  
• The position of the light is set relative to the point of view and line of vision of the window. By default, the light is located in  
the rear right quarter of the line of vision.  
• One point light must be used as the light.  
Left  
: Moves the light perpendicular to the line of vision.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: Moves the light along the line of vision.  
Chapter  
2
Operating Procedure  
View  
Menu  
Click [Move Light] on the [View] menu.  
The active window will be set in shading  
mode.  
1
Drag the item in an element view win-  
dow while holding down the left mouse  
button.  
2
The light will move on a plane perpendicular to  
the line of vision, causing the view of the ele-  
ment to change accordingly.  
• Dragging upward while holding down the right  
mouse button will move the light forward along  
the line of vision, and dragging downward will  
move the light backward along the line of vision.  
Memo  
Dragging while holding down the [Shift] key will in-  
crease the movement of the light.  
Press the [ESC] key.  
3
View–Area Orbit mode will be canceled.  
However, the element will remain displayed in  
shading mode.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Camera Settings  
Setting the Camera Parameters  
This command is used to set the camera parameters.  
Memo  
• The camera indicator is provided to help you understand the direction in which the image displayed in “Isometric” or “Perspec-  
tive” element view window is taken. (The image displayed in “Isometric” or “Perspective” element view window is the image  
of the object viewed from the camera position.)  
• The point of interest indicates the direction in which the image is taken by the camera.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [View] menu, select [Camera]  
1
and then click [Settings].  
The [View-Camera Settings] dialog box will  
appear.  
Chapter  
2
View  
Menu  
Set the camera parameters.  
2
Note  
If the window view is not set to Isometric or Perspective,  
some parameters settings are disabled. In particular, it will  
not be possible to set the “View angle” or to set some of the  
“View point” and “Interest” values, as follows.  
• If view is set to Front or Back: Only the Z parameters  
can be set.  
• If view is set to Top or Bottom: Only the Y parameters  
can be set.  
• If view is set to Right or Left: Only the X parameters  
can be set.  
• If view is set to Isometric, all parameters other than  
“View angle” can be set.  
• If view is set to Perspective, all parameters can be set.  
Click the [Preview] button.  
3
The changes made to the camera parameters  
for the active window will be effective, and  
the contents of the element view window will  
change accordingly.  
Click the [OK] button.  
4
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
The dialog box will close and the changes  
made to the element view window will be  
confirmed.  
Parameters for [View-Camera Settings] Dialog Box  
Camera position  
View point  
Interest  
Position of the point of interest  
Position (distance from camera) at which subject becomes visible  
Position (distance from camera) at which subject goes out of sight  
View angle of the camera  
Near plane  
Far plane  
View angle  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View – Image  
Displaying Color Images  
This command is used to display color images of the element currently selected in the element list.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the de-  
sired element.  
1
Click [Image] on the [View] menu.  
An image window will open and display a color  
image of the selected element.  
2
Memo  
If the element includes multiple color images, you can  
switch among color images by placing the mouse pointer  
over the element view window, opening the pop-up menu,  
and selecting the Change Image command.  
Chapter  
2
View  
Menu  
View – Show Element List/Hide Element List  
Displaying/Hiding the Element List  
This command is used to display or hide the element list.  
Operating Procedure When the element list is not displayed:  
Click [Show Element List] on the [View]  
menu.  
The element list will be displayed.  
1
Operating Procedure When the element list is displayed:  
Click [Hide Element List] on the [View]  
menu.  
The element list will be closed.  
1
View – Show Toolbar  
Displaying the Toolbar  
This command is used to display the toolbar.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Operating Procedure When the toolbar is not displayed:  
Click [Show Toolbar] on the [View]  
1
menu.  
The toolbar will appear.  
Memo  
Nothing will happen if the toolbar is already displayed.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select Menu  
Chapter  
2
Point ………………………………………………………………………………… 158  
Rectangle……………………………………………………………………………… 159  
Bezier ………………………………………………………………………………… 160  
Boundary – Elements ………………………………………………………………… 162  
Boundary – Points …………………………………………………………………… 162  
Color ………………………………………………………………………………… 163  
Toggle Points ………………………………………………………………………… 165  
Select by Elements …………………………………………………………………… 165  
Unselect by Elements ………………………………………………………………… 166  
Select Front ………………………………………………………………………… 166  
Select  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Point  
Selecting/Unselecting a Point by Clicking the Mouse  
This command is used to select or unselect the clicked point.  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Left  
: Selects one point present within the rectangle area by clicking the mouse.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: Unselects one point present within the rectangle area by clicking the mouse.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the de-  
sired element.  
1
Chapter  
2
Click [Point] on the [Select] menu.  
2
The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if it  
is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to  
be displayed.  
Select  
Menu  
Click the desired point.  
The point will be selected if it is left-clicked  
and unselected if it is right-clicked.  
3
Memo  
• Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected  
points will be displayed in blue.  
• If the Select – Select Front command is switched on  
(i.e. the command name is checked in the menu), the  
Select– Point command will operate only on points  
comprising polygons that are at the front and that are  
visible, and the mouse cursor will change to “+F”. If  
the Select – Select Front command is off (unchecked),  
the Select – Point command will operate on all points,  
and the mouse cursor will change to “+”.  
Press the [ESC] key.  
Select – Point mode will be canceled.  
4
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Rectangle  
[E] (Effective while held down)  
Selecting/Unselecting Points within Specified Rectangle Area  
This command is used to select/unselect the points present within a rectangle area drawn using the mouse.  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Note  
When Windows Vista or Windows 7 is used, it may occur that the object cannot be drawn. In this case, please set the window  
design other than Windows Aero. To change the window design, right-click on the desktop and select Personalize – Window  
Color and Appearance.  
Left  
: Selects all the points present within the rectangle area.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: Unselects all the points present within the rectangle area.  
Chapter  
2
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the de-  
sired element.  
1
Select  
Menu  
Click [Rectangle] on the [Select] menu.  
2
The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if it  
is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to  
be displayed.  
Locate the mouse pointer to the start  
3
point of the desired area (rectangle),  
press the left mouse button and drag  
it, then release the mouse button at the  
end point.  
Press a mouse button at the start point.  
Release the mouse  
Drag  
button at the end  
point.  
A rectangle will be drawn as illustrated, and all  
the points inside the rectangle will be selected  
if the rectangle is drawn while the left mouse  
button is pressed or they will be unselected  
if it is drawn while the right mouse button is  
pressed.  
Memo  
• Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected  
points will be displayed in blue.  
• If using the shortcut key (default is [E]), note that you  
must hold the key down while setting the range of  
points to be selected (or deselected). The shortcut key  
works only on visible parts of the element.  
• If the Select – Select Front command is switched on  
(i.e. the command name is checked in the menu), the  
Select – Point command will operate only on points  
comprising polygons that are at the front and that are  
visible, and the mouse cursor will change to “+F”. If  
the Select – Select Front command is off (unchecked),  
the Select – Point command will operate on all points,  
and the mouse cursor will change to “+”.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Press the [ESC] key.  
Select – Rectangle mode will be canceled.  
4
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Bezier  
Selecting Points within Specified Bezier Curve  
This command is used to select the points present within a Bezier curve drawn using the mouse.  
Note  
• No any other commands can be executed until this command is canceled. To execute another command, press the [ESC]  
key to cancel the Select – Bezier mode.  
All the steps must be carried out within the same window. The size of the window (full or 1/4) must be set in advance.  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Note  
When Windows Vista or Windows 7 is used, it may occur that the object cannot be drawn. In this case, please set the window  
design other than Windows Aero. To change the window design, right-click on the desktop and select Personalize – Window  
Color and Appearance.  
Left  
: Sets control points/Edits control points if the curve is closed.  
Chapter  
2
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : Confirms the curve if it has been closed/Unselects the points and exits the menu.  
Right  
:
Closes the curve/Confirms the curve if it has been closed/Selects the points and exits the menu.  
Operating Procedure  
Select  
Menu  
From the element list, select the de-  
sired element.  
1
2
Click [Bezier] on the [Select] menu.  
The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if it  
is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to  
be displayed.  
Enclose the desired area with a Bezier  
curve.  
3
Control point  
Clicking the left mouse button will create a  
control point. Dragging it will create a tangent  
line for the created control point. Locate the  
mouse to the next desired point, and click the  
left button to create another control point.  
Repeat the above steps until the desired area  
is enclosed with a Bezier curve.  
Drag  
Tangent line  
Memo  
• The Bezier curve will be shown in white and the con-  
trol points in yellow.  
• If the Select – Select Front command is switched on  
(i.e. the command name is checked in themenu), the  
Select – Point command will operate only on points  
comprising polygons that are at the front and that are  
visible, and the mouse cursor will change to “+F”. If  
the Select – Select Front command is off (unchecked),  
the Select – Point command will operate on all points,  
and the mouse cursor will change to “+”.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Click the right mouse button.  
The Bezier curve will be closed and edit mode  
is activated.  
4
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Bezier  
To edit the Bezier curve, drag control  
points or tangent lines while holding  
down the left button.  
5
6
Click the right or middle mouse button.  
If the right button is clicked, the Bezier curve  
will be confirmed, and the points present  
within the curve will be selected.  
Memo  
• Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected  
points will be displayed in blue.  
• If the Select – Select Front command is switched on  
(if the command name is checked in the menu), then  
the Select – Bezier command operates only on points  
comprising polygons that are at the front and that are  
visible. If the Select – Select Front command is off  
(unchecked), then the Select – Bezier command oper-  
ates on all points.  
If the middle button is clicked, the Bezier curve  
will be confirmed, and the points present  
within the curve will be unselected.  
Chapter  
2
Select  
Menu  
Press the [ESC] key.  
Select – Bezier mode will be canceled.  
7
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Boundary – Elements  
Selecting Only the Boundary of Holes of Element(s)  
This command is used to select only the points on the boundary of holes among those comprising the selected  
element(s).  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element(s).  
1
Chapter  
2
From the [Select] menu, select [Bound-  
ary] and then click [Elements].  
2
• The selected element(s) will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Among the points comprising the currently se-  
lected element(s), the points on the boundary  
of holes will be selected and the other points  
will be unselected.  
Select  
Menu  
Select – Boundary – Points  
Selecting Only the Boundary of Holes of Points  
This command is used to select only the points on the boundary of holes, among those currently selected.  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
Select the desired points.  
2
3
From the [Select] menu, select [Bound-  
ary] and then click [Points].  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Among the selected points, the points on the  
boundary of holes will be selected and the  
other points will be unselected.  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not dis-  
played in the active window or the windows for  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Color  
Selecting Points within Specified Homogeneous Area  
This command is used to select the points corresponding to the homogeneous areas that are selected by speci-  
fying sample color data (sample point) on the color image window.  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Left  
: Selects the sample color data (sample points).  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : Selects the sample color data to be excluded from the area enclosed by a dotted line.  
Right  
: Cancels the previous operation (Undo).  
Operating Procedure  
Chapter  
2
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
2
Click [Color] on the [Select] menu.  
The [Select-Color] dialog box will appear.  
The cursor will switch to a cross cursor when it  
is located over the color image window.  
Select  
Menu  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not  
displayed in the active window or the windows for  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
• If the image window that displays a color image  
has not been opened, it will be displayed when  
this command is selected. If the color image win-  
dow of an element other than the selected element  
is currently displayed, it will be closed.  
On the color image window, locate the  
cross cursor to the point (sample point)  
containing the desired color, then click  
the left mouse button.  
An “×” mark will be displayed on the sample  
point, and the homogeneous color area  
around the sample  
3
4
point will be enclosed by a blinking dotted line.  
The size of the area changes according to the  
value set in [Color range].  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
While observing the selected area, ad-  
just the Color range (1 to 100) in the  
[Select-Color] dialogbox.  
• The larger the color range is, the larger the en-  
closed area.  
• If the color range is changed after the sample  
point is specified, the selected area (the area en-  
closed by a dotted line) will change accordingly.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Colort  
If the enclosed area contains an un-  
wanted area, locate the cursor to the  
sample point of that area and click the  
middle mouse button ([Shift] + Left but-  
ton).  
5
The corresponding area on the color image will  
be excluded from the enclosed area, accord-  
ing to the [Color range].  
If you need another sample area, locate  
the cursor to another sample point,  
then click the left button.  
A new enclosed area will be created on the  
color image.  
6
7
Chapter  
2
• Clicking the right mouse button over an image  
window will cancel the selections made by click-  
ing the left button or middle button ([Shift] + Left  
button), and will cause the previously selected  
areas to be displayed. (This will also cancel the  
sample points.)  
Select  
Menu  
Only the one previous selection can be canceled.  
Older selections will not be canceled.  
Click the [Apply] button.  
The points corresponding to the selected ar-  
eas on the color image will be selected.  
• Only the points comprising front-facing surfaces  
will be selected.  
Memo  
• Each time the [Apply] button is clicked, the previously  
selected areas and selection state of the points in those  
areas will be canceled, and the points within the cur-  
rently selected areas will be selected.  
• Points on back surfaces, points forming back-fac-  
ing surfaces and isolated points that are not form-  
ing a surface will not be selected.  
• If sample areas are selected on more than two color im-  
age windows and the color image window is switched  
from one to another, the sample areas (i.e. areas en-  
closed by a dotted line) on the previous color image  
window will be deleted. The state of the points selected  
by clicking the [Apply] button on the previous color  
image window will be confirmed, and those selected  
by clicking the [Apply] button from the sample area  
on the new color image window will be added to the  
confirmed points.  
Click the [OK] button.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
8
Selection state of the points on the element  
view window will be confirmed, and the dialog  
box will be closed.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Toggle Points  
Reversing Selection State of Points of Selected Element(s)  
This command is used to reverse the selection state of all the points present in the currently selected  
element(s).  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
Click [Toggle Points] on the [Select]  
menu.  
Selection state of all the points present in the  
currently selected element will be reversed.  
Chapter  
2
2
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is n ot displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Select  
Menu  
Select – Select by Elements  
Selecting All the Points of Element(s)  
[Ctrl] + [A]  
This command is used to select all the points present in the currently selected element(s).  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
Click [Select by Elements] on the [Se-  
lect] menu.  
All the points present in the selected element  
will be selected.  
2
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select – Unselect by Elements  
Unselecting All the Points of Element(s)  
This command is used to unselect all the points present in the currently selected element(s).  
Memo  
Selected points will be displayed in red, and unselected points will be displayed in blue.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
Click [Unselect by Elements] on the  
[Select] menu.  
All the points present in the selected element  
Chapter  
2
2
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
will be unselected.  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Select  
Menu  
Select – Select Front  
Selecting Only the Points Comprising Polygons that are Both Visible and at the Front  
This command is used to limit point selection to only the points that comprise visible, front-facing polygons  
(as determined by the current view direction of the selected element).  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Select Front] on the [Select]  
menu.  
1
A check mark will be placed and cleared al-  
ternately each time this command is selected.  
(Select Front is enabled when a check mark is  
placed, and disabled when no check mark is  
placed.)  
• This command determines the action of the Select  
– Point, Select – Rectangle and Select – Bezier  
commands. Specifically, if the Select – Select  
Front command is active (if a checkmark appears  
next to the command name in the menu), then the  
Select – Point, Select – Rectangle and Select  
– Bezier commands will only operate on points  
comprising front-facing, visible polygons. In this  
case, the mouse cursor will change to “+F”.  
• If no check mark is placed, all the points in the  
selecting area will be selected. In this case, the  
mouse cursor will change to “+”.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit Menu  
Chapter  
2
Undo ………………………………………………………………………………… 168  
Redo ………………………………………………………………………………… 168  
Delete – Elements …………………………………………………………………… 169  
Delete – Points ……………………………………………………………………… 170  
Delete – Polygons …………………………………………………………………… 170  
Images ……………………………………………………………………………… 171  
Define ………………………………………………………………………………… 178  
Recalc LOD ………………………………………………………………………… 179  
Edit  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Undo  
Canceling the Previous Operation  
[Ctrl] + [z]  
This command is used to cancel the previous operation. This command can be performed for the number of  
times specified by the File – Preferences command.  
Note  
Execution of this command may not display simplified data.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Preferences command, refer to page 142.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Undo] on the [Edit] menu.  
1
The state in effect before the previous opera-  
tion was performed will be restored. (In the  
case of a command that activates a mode, the  
state in effect before that command was per-  
formed will be restored.)  
Memo  
The Undo function cannot be used for the following.  
• Commands in the [File] menu, except for those  
provided to import camera data and element data  
• Commands in the [Info], [View], [File Import  
Digitizer] and [Window] menus  
Chapter  
2
• Selection and display in the element list  
• Commands in pop-up menus, except for those  
provided to delete elements.  
Edit  
Menu  
• Changes to window properties  
• Selection/unselection of elements in the element  
view windows  
• Operations on image windows  
Edit – Redo  
Performing the Canceled Operation  
[Ctrl] + [Y]  
This command is used to perform the previous operation that has been canceled by the Edit – Undo command.  
It is possible to repeat this command up to the state in effect before the Edit – Undo was started.  
Note  
Execution of this command may not display simplified data.  
Ref.  
For details of the Edit – Undo command, refer to page 168.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Redo] on the [Edit] menu.  
1
The previous operation that has been can-  
celed by the Edit – Undo command will be  
performed.  
Memo  
This command can be repeated until the state in effect  
before the Edit – Undo was performed is restored.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Delete – Elements  
Deleting the Selected Elements from the Element List  
This command is used to delete the element(s) selected from the element list.  
Memo  
The Edit – Delete – Elements command has the same function as the File – Remove Elements command.  
Ref.  
For details of the File – Remove Elements command, refer to page 141.  
Operating Procedure  
Memo  
From the element list, select the  
element(s) you want to delete.  
1
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
Chapter  
2
From the [Edit] menu, select [Delete]  
and then click [Elements].  
A message dialog box asking you whether to  
2
Edit  
Menu  
delete all the selected elements will appear.  
Click the [OK] button.  
All the selected elements and their corre-  
sponding points will be removed.  
3
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Delete – Points  
Deleting the Selected Points  
[Ctrl] + [X]  
This command is used to delete the point(s) selected for the currently displayed element.  
Note  
Execution of this command may not display simplified data.  
Operating Procedure  
Memo  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
Select the point(s) you want to delete.  
2
3
Chapter  
2
From the [Edit] menu, select [Delete]  
and then click [Points].  
The selected point(s) will be deleted.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Edit  
Menu  
Memo  
If all the points of the element are deleted, the element  
will be deleted from the element list.  
Edit – Delete – Polygons  
Deleting Polygons Comprised of Selected Points  
This command is used to delete the polygon(s) that are comprised of the points selected in the currently displayed  
element.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
Memo  
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
Select the polygon(s) you want to de-  
lete.  
To select a polygon, all the constituent verti-  
2
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
ces must be selected.  
From the [Edit] menu, select [Delete]  
and then click [Polygons].  
The selected polygon(s) will be deleted.  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not dis-  
played in the active window or the windows for  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
3
Memo  
Even if a polygon is deleted, the vertices comprising that  
polygon will not be deleted.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Images  
Editing the Texture of Selected Element  
This command is used to edit or output color images of the selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
From the [Edit] menu, and then click  
[Images].  
2
Chapter  
2
The [Edit-Images] dialog box will appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Edit  
Menu  
• If image windows for displaying color images  
have been opened, they will be closed when this  
command is selected.  
The [Texture List] will show the names of the  
images that belong to the selected element.  
• Clicking an image name will display its corre-  
Note  
sponding color image.  
An error message will appear if an element that has no  
images is selected. In this case, the command will not  
be executed.  
Add, delete or replace textures.  
3
4
Click the [OK] button.  
The [Edit-Images] dialog box will close, and  
the texture changes made at step 3 will be  
effected.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Images  
n Adding a Texture ([ADD] button)  
The [Add] button allows you to add a texture to the element.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [Edit-Images] dialog box is displayed.  
Click the [Add] button.  
The [Edit-Images-Open Image] dialog box will  
appear.  
1
Chapter  
2
Select the desired texture file.  
2
• To display files of a certain format only, select the  
desired format from the [Files of type] pull-down  
menu.  
Click the [Open] button.  
3
Edit  
Menu  
The [Edit-Image] and [Edit-Images-Open Im-  
age] dialog boxes will close, the data of the  
selected file will be loaded, then the [Point Set]  
dialog box will appear.  
• All the element view windows will disappear (be  
hidden), an image window to display the color  
image of the loaded data and an image window to  
display the color image of the element will ap-  
pear.  
On the first image window click the  
4
desired point using the left mouse but-  
ton, then clickthe left button at its cor-  
responding point on the second image  
window.  
When the left mouse button is clicked on an  
image window, a marker (“×” mark) will be  
displayed. A red marker will be displayed for  
the point you are currently designating, and a  
black marker for those that have already been  
designated.  
Note  
9i  
• An alarm will be heard if a point that has no data is  
clicked in the image window showing the color image  
of the element, or if the left button is clicked twice or  
more continuously in the same window.  
• It is not possible to close image windows.  
910  
900  
700  
300  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Images  
Repeat step 4 until six or more pairs of  
corresponding points are designated.  
The order of designating points in the first and  
second image windows for the first pair can  
differ from that for the second pair.  
5
6
Memo  
For satisfactory registration of the images, approximately  
12 pairs of corresponding points must be designated.  
To delete a pair of corresponding  
points, click either of those points with  
the left mouse button while holding  
down the [Shift] button.  
Chapter  
2
The pair of corresponding points will be de-  
leted.  
• Even when designating corresponding points,  
they can be deleted by clicking with the left  
mouse button while holding down the [Shift] but-  
ton.  
Edit  
Menu  
• An alarm will be heard if a point other those  
designated is clicked with the left mouse button  
while holding down the [Shift] button.  
Click the [Preview] button.  
A temporary window will appear, showing the  
preview image.  
• The temporary window is a Perspective view, and  
is displayed in texture mapping mode.  
• Dragging while holding down the left mouse  
button inside the preview window will rotate the  
camera.  
7
8
Memo  
Note  
If registration is not satisfactory, designate more cor-  
responding points or delete unsatisfactory corresponding  
points.  
• An error message will appear if only five or less pairs  
of points have been designated.  
• An error message will appear if calculation cannot be  
made based on the designated points.  
Click the [OK] button.  
A new image will be added to the element.  
• All the image windows, [Point Set] dialog box  
and the temporary window (if it is open) will  
close, and the [Edit-Image] dialog box will ap-  
pear. All the element view windows will also  
appear.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
The added image will be displayed in the [Tex-  
ture List] in the [Edit-Image] dialog box.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Images  
n Replacing a Texture ([Replace] button)  
The [Replace] button allows you to replace a texture with a new one.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [Edit-Images] dialog box is displayed.  
From the Texture List, select the de-  
sired image.  
1
Click the [Replace] button.  
The [Edit-Images-Open Image] dialog box will  
appear.  
2
Chapter  
2
Select the desired texture file.  
3
• To display files of a certain format only, select the  
desired format from the [File of type] pulldown  
menu.  
Edit  
Menu  
Click the [Open] button.  
4
The data of the selected file will be loaded,  
replacing the image selected from the [Texture  
List] with the one loaded.  
• The [Edit-Images-Open Image] dialog box will  
close, and the name of that new image will be  
displayed in the [Texture List] in the [Edit-Image]  
dialog box.  
Note  
If the aspect ratio of the selected image differs from the  
aspect ratio of the image selected in the Texture list, the  
program will display an error message. In this case, the  
texture will not be replaced.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Images  
n Deleting a Texture ([Delete] button)  
The [Delete] button allows you to delete a texture from the element.  
Operating Procedure  
Before starting the following procedure, make sure that the [Edit-Images] dialog box is displayed.  
From the [Texture List], select the de-  
sired image.  
1
Click the [Delete] button.  
A message dialog box asking you whether to  
delete the selected image will appear.  
2
Chapter  
2
Click the [OK] button.  
3
The selected image will be deleted.  
• The name of the deleted image will be removed  
from the [Texture List] in the [Edit-Image] dialog  
box.  
Edit  
Menu  
n Exporting a Texture ([Export])  
The [Export] button lets you output the selected texture in any of a variety of data formats.  
Operating Procedure  
Open the [Edit-Images] dialog box before starting the following procedure.  
Click on the appropriate image name in  
the [Texture List] of the [Edit-Images]  
dialog box.  
1
Click the [Export] button.  
The [Export-Image] dialog box will appear.  
2
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Memo  
Now proceed in the same way as if using the File-Export-  
Images command.  
Ref. For information about the File- Export -Images com-  
mand, see page 115.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Images  
n Changing a Texture’s Brightness ([Brightness])  
Use the [Brightness] slidebar to adjust the brightness of the selected texture.  
Operating Procedure  
Open the [Edit-Images] dialog box before starting the following procedure.  
Click on the appropriate image name in  
the [Texture List] of the [Edit-Images]  
dialog box.  
1
Chapter  
2
Adjust the brightness by moving the  
2
[Brightness] slidebar.  
The brightness changes as you move the  
slidebar.  
If you want to return to the original  
brightness, click [Reset].  
The [Reset] button resets both the brightness  
Edit  
Menu  
3
and contrast to their original settings.  
When you are satisfied with the bright-  
ness, click [OK].  
The program registers the new brightness set-  
4
ting, and the dialog closes.  
• The program will also register your new setting  
if you change the name selection in the [Texture  
List] of the [Edit-Images] dialog box.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Images  
n Changing a Texture’s Contrast ([Contrast])  
Use the [Contrast] slidebar to adjust the contrast of the selected texture.  
Operating Procedure  
Open the [Edit-Images] dialog box before starting the following procedure.  
Click on the appropriate image name in  
the [Texture List] of the [Edit-Images]  
dialog box.  
1
Chapter  
2
Adjust the contrast by moving the [Con-  
trast] slidebar.  
The contrast changes as you move the slide-  
2
bar.  
If you want to return to the original con-  
trast, click [Reset].  
The [Reset] button resets both the brightness  
Edit  
Menu  
3
and contrast to their original settings.  
When you are satisfied with the con-  
trast, click [OK].  
4
The program registers the new contrast set-  
ting, and the dialog box will close.  
• The program will also register your new setting  
if you change the name selection in the [Texture  
List] of the [Edit-Images] dialog box.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Define  
Defining Points as a New Element  
This command is used to define the points selected for the currently selected element(s) as a new element.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element(s).  
1
Select the desired points.  
2
3
Click [Define] on the [Edit] menu.  
Chapter  
2
The [Edit-Define] dialog box will appear.  
• The selected element(s) will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Edit  
Menu  
Enter the desired element name, and  
set parameters.  
4
• To copy the color image data of the original ele-  
ment, check the [Copy image(s)] checkbox.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The selected points will be defined as an ele-  
ment.  
5
Note  
The element name must consist of up to 31 alphanu-  
meric characters.  
• The defined element will be displayed in the win-  
dow. The name of the element will also appear in  
the element list, indicating that the element has  
been selected.  
• All the elements except for those newly defined  
will be hidden in all windows and cannot be  
selected.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit – Recalc LOD  
Recalculating the Simplified Display Data  
This command is used to recalculate the simplified display data of the element(s) selected in the element list.  
Note  
This feature is disabled if you have set [Use LOD] to “Off” in the File-Preferences dialog (Default Behavior tab).  
Memo  
The simplified display data is displayed, for example, while the camera is dragged. If recalculation is not performed, the  
data in effect when the element(s) was simplified lastly will be displayed. If necessary, recalculate the simplified display  
data after the data is edited.  
Operating Procedure  
Chapter  
2
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
Edit  
Menu  
Click [Recalc LOD] on the [Edit] menu.  
2
The simplified display data of the selected ele-  
ment will be recalculated.  
Note  
An error message may appear if the selected element  
contains an excessively small number of polygons.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Edit  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build Menu  
Chapter  
2
Registration – Initial – Manual ……………………………………………………… 182  
Registration – Initial – Auto ………………………………………………………… 184  
Registration – Fine – Elements ……………………………………………………… 185  
Registration – Fine – Points ………………………………………………………… 186  
Move – Points ………………………………………………………………………… 187  
Move – Elements …………………………………………………………………… 189  
Move – To Origin …………………………………………………………………… 191  
Move – To X-Y-Z …………………………………………………………………… 192  
Rotate – Elements …………………………………………………………………… 198  
Merge ………………………………………………………………………………… 200  
Fill Holes – Manual ………………………………………………………………… 201  
Fill Holes – Auto……………………………………………………………………… 202  
Smooth – Element …………………………………………………………………… 204  
Smooth – Points ……………………………………………………………………… 205  
Subsample – Uniformly – Element…………………………………………………… 206  
Subsample – Uniformly – Points …………………………………………………… 207  
Subsample – Adaptively – Element ………………………………………………… 208  
Subsample – Adaptively – Points …………………………………………………… 209  
Modify – Element …………………………………………………………………… 210  
Modify – Points ……………………………………………………………………… 211  
Subdivision – Element ……………………………………………………………… 212  
Subdivision – Points ………………………………………………………………… 213  
Triangulate – Elements ……………………………………………………………… 214  
Triangulate – Polygons ……………………………………………………………… 214  
Texture Blending …………………………………………………………………… 215  
Check Polygons – Element………………………………………………………… 216  
Check Polygons – Polygons ………………………………………………………… 218  
Build  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Registration – Initial – Manual  
Performing Initial Registration of Elements Manually  
This command is used to perform registration of elements by designating corresponding points.  
Left  
: Designates corresponding points.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : Cancels designation of corresponding points  
Right  
: Performs registration.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
elements.  
1
2
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Registra-  
tion], [Initial] and then click [Manual].  
The [Build-Registration-Initial-Manual] dialog  
box will appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Select the basis element in the dialog  
box, and click the [OK] button.  
All the currently displayed windows will be  
hidden, and the temporary window for each  
selected element will appear.  
3
4
• Each temporary window is a “Isometric” or  
“Perspective” view and displayed in texture map-  
ping mode (if the element has a color image) or in  
shading mode (if the element has no color image).  
One element will be displayed in each temporary  
window. The elements will be fully framed.  
• It is not possible to change the view mode and  
rendering mode for the temporary windows.  
On the first window click the desired  
point using the left mouse button, then  
click the left button at the correspond-  
ing point on the second window.  
When the left mouse button is clicked on a  
window, a marker (n mark) will be displayed.  
Different colors of markers are available, and  
each pair of corresponding points will have a  
different color.  
Memo  
Dragging a corresponding point with the left mouse  
button will move it.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Note  
An alarm will be heard if a point that has no data is  
clicked in a window or if the left button is clicked twice  
or more continuously in the same window.  
Repeat step 4 until three or more pairs  
of corresponding points are designated.  
The order of designating points in the first and  
second windows for the first pair can differ  
from that for the second pair.  
5
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Registration – Initial – Manual  
To delete a pair of corresponding  
points, click either of those points with  
the middle button ([Shift] + Left).  
The marker will be deleted.  
6
7
8
Note  
Memo  
An alarm will be heard if a point other those designated  
is clicked with the middle button ([Shift] + Left).  
Even when designating corresponding points, they can  
be deleted by clicking with the middle button ([Shift] +  
Left).  
After designation of corresponding  
points has been completed, click the  
right mouse button.  
The initial registration will start, and the result  
will be displayed in the window.  
Chapter  
2
A message dialog box asking whether the  
result is satisfactory will appear.  
Build  
Menu  
Click the [OK] button.  
The program executes fine registration, and  
opens a dialog asking whether the results are  
satisfactory.  
• If you click [Retry], the program will reopen the  
temporary windows so that you can reset the cor-  
respondences again.  
• If you click [Cancel], fine registration will be  
canceled and closes the menu.  
Click the [OK] button.  
9
All temporary registration windows close, and  
the program reopens the windows that were  
on display when you started the command.  
• To continue fine registration processing, click the  
[Repeat] button.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Memo  
The [Error Average] and [Sigma] values are indicators of  
the correctness of the registration (the alignment).  
In general, the closer to zero they are, the more accurate  
alignment is.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Registration – Initial – Auto  
Performing Initial Registration of Elements Automatically  
This command is used to automatically detect data overlap of each element to perform registration of the ele-  
ments.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
elements.  
1
Memo  
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
Select the desired points for each se-  
lected element.  
The selected points will be subjected to detec-  
2
Chapter  
2
tion of overlapped data.  
From the [Build] menu, select [Registra-  
3
tion], [Initial] and then click [Auto].  
The [Build-Registration-Initial-Auto] dialog box  
will appear.  
Build  
Menu  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Select the basis element in the dialog  
box, and click the [OK] button.  
Initial registration will start. A bar will be dis-  
4
Memo  
• If registration with the selected basis element fails for  
any elements, a new basis element will be selected au-  
tomatically from the elements whose relative positions  
are known.  
played to indicate progress of initial registration.  
• If 50% or more of the element data overlap or if ele-  
ments are angled at less than approximately 60 degrees,  
initial registration may be satisfactory. (However, it  
may still fail depending on the shape of the elements.)  
Note  
An error message will appear if the number of points  
selected in the elements is below a certain number.  
The dialog box shown on the right will appear  
when initial registration was successful for all  
the elements.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
The dialog box shown on the right will appear  
if initial registration was unsuccessful for any  
of the elements.  
• The elements that have failed initial registration  
will be hidden in all windows.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The menu will be exited.  
5
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Registration – Fine – Elements  
Performing Fine Registration of Elements  
This command is used to perform registration of the selected elements.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
elements.  
1
Memo  
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
From the [Build] menu, select [Registra-  
tion], [Fine] and then click [Elements].  
The [Build-Registration-Fine-Elements] dialog  
box will appear.  
2
Chapter  
2
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the base element, and then click  
the [OK] button.  
The program executes fine registration for the  
selected elements, and displays a dialog ask-  
ing whether results are satisfactory.  
3
4
Click the [OK] button.  
The menu will be exited.  
• To continue fine registration processing, click the  
[Repeat] button.  
Memo  
The [Error Average] and [Sigma] values are indicators of  
the correctness of the registration (the alignment).  
In general, the closer to zero they are, the more accurate  
alignment is.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Registration – Fine – Points  
Performing Fine Registration of Selected Points  
This command is used to perform fine registration of the points present in the selected elements.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
elements.  
1
Memo  
• It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
• Among the selected elements, the element located first  
in the element list will be used as the basis element for  
registration.  
Chapter  
2
From each selected element, select the  
points to be subjected to fine registra-  
tion.  
2
3
From the [Build] menu, select [Registra-  
tion], [Fine] and then click [Points].  
The [Build-Registration-Fine-Points] dialog box  
will appear.  
Build  
Menu  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Set the base element, and then click the  
[OK] button.  
The program executes fine registration for the  
selected points in the selected elements. It  
then displays a dialog asking whether results  
are satisfactory.  
4
5
Click the [OK] button.  
The menu will be exited.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
• To continue fine registration processing, click the  
[Repeat] button.  
Memo  
The [Error Average] and [Sigma] values are indicators of  
the correctness of the registration (the alignment).  
In general, the closer to zero they are, the more accurate  
alignment is.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – Points  
Moving the Selected Points  
[P] (Effective while held down)  
This command is used to move the selected point(s).  
Note  
Execution of this command may not display simplified data.  
Left  
: Moves the point(s) using the mouse.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : Moves the point(s) along the major axis.  
Right  
: Moves the point(s) by entering values.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
elements.  
1
Chapter  
2
Select the point(s) you want to move.  
2
3
From the [Build] menu, select [Move]  
and then click [Points].  
Build  
The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if it  
is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to  
be displayed.  
Menu  
• If you select all of the element’s points at Step 2  
above, this command becomes equivalent to the  
Build – Move – Elements command.  
Ref.  
For information about the Build – Move – Elements  
command, see page 189.  
Drag the points with the left mouse but-  
ton.  
The point(s) will move accordingly.  
• Dragging with the middle (or [Shift] + Left) but-  
ton will move the point(s) along the major axis.  
4
5
Press the [ESC] key.  
Build – Move – Points mode will be canceled.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – Points  
n Moving the Point(s) by Entering Values  
To move the point(s) by specifying how much they must be moved, follow the procedure given below.  
Note  
If Build – Move – Points mode was activated using the shortcut key, the point(s) cannot be moved by this method.  
Operating Procedure The following steps must be carried out in Build – Move – Points mode.  
Click the right mouse button.  
The [Build-Move-Points] dialog box will ap-  
pear.  
1
Chapter  
2
Enter the desired amount of movement  
for X, Y and Z.  
The amount can be entered for all the axes at  
2
the same time.  
Build  
Menu  
Click the [Apply] button.  
The selected point(s) will move according to  
the values entered.  
3
• If you change a value(s) and click the [Apply]  
button, the point(s) will move again according to  
the new value(s).  
New values will not be added to the previous  
values. They are absolute values from the original  
position.  
• Clicking the [Cancel] button will cancel all the  
operations that have been performed since the  
dialog box was opened.  
Click the [OK] button.  
4
The [Build-Move-Points] dialog box will close,  
movement of the point(s) will be confirmed,  
and the Build-Move-Points mode will be  
canceled.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – Elements  
Moving Element(s)  
[M] (Effective while held down)  
This command is used to move the selected element(s).  
Left  
: Moves the element(s) using the mouse.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : Moves the element(s) along the major axis.  
Right  
: Moves the element(s) by entering values.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element(s).  
1
2
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Move]  
and then click [Elements].  
The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if it  
is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to  
be displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Drag with the left mouse button.  
The element(s) will move accordingly.  
• Dragging with the middle (or [Shift] + Left) but-  
ton will move the element(s) along the major axis.  
3
4
Memo  
The element will be displayed in simple form during  
drag. It will be displayed in detailed form when dragging  
is canceled.  
Press the [ESC] key.  
Build – Move – Elements mode will be can-  
celed.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – Elements  
n Moving the Element(s) by Entering Values  
To move the element(s) by specifying how much they must be moved, follow the procedure given below.  
Note  
If Build – Move – Elements mode was activated using the shortcut key, the element(s) cannot be moved by this method.  
Operating Procedure The following steps must be carried out in Build – Move – Elements mode.  
Click the right mouse button.  
The [Build-Move-Elements] dialog box will ap-  
pear.  
1
Chapter  
2
Enter the desired amount of movement  
for X, Y and Z.  
The amount can be entered for all the axes at  
2
the same time.  
Build  
Menu  
Click the [Apply] button.  
The selected element(s) will move according to  
the values entered.  
3
• If you change a value(s) and click the [Apply]  
button, the element(s) will move again according  
to the new value(s).  
New values will not be added to the previous  
values. They are absolute values from the original  
position.  
Click the [OK] button.  
4
The [Build-Move-Points] dialog box will close,  
movement of the point(s) will be confirmed,  
and the Build-Move-Points mode will be  
canceled.  
• Clicking the [Cancel] button will cancel all the  
operations that have been performed since the  
dialog box was opened.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – To Origin  
Moving the Element(s) to the Origin  
This command is used to move the selected element(s) to the origin.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element(s).  
1
From the [Build] menu, select [Move]  
and then click [To Origin].  
2
The selected element(s) will move in such a  
way that the center of gravity of all the con-  
stituent points is located at the origin.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Chapter  
2
Build  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – To X-Y-Z  
Converting the Coordinate System of Elements  
This command is used to convert the coordinate system of the currently selected element(s) to the specified  
coordinate system.  
Note  
When you execute this command, all screen display modes change to Show Vertex.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element(s).  
1
Memo  
It is possible to select two or more elements by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.  
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Move]  
and then click [To X-Y-Z].  
The [Build-Move-To X-Y-Z] dialog box will ap-  
2
pear.  
• The selected element(s) will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed (i.e. the windows that are not set to “Se-  
lective”).  
Build  
Menu  
At the pull-down menu, select the de-  
3
sired method for setting the new coor-  
dinate system. Then click the [OK] but-  
ton.  
Extract the desired face, lines and  
points.  
4
• If you have selected [Point/Point/Point], extract  
three points in succession.  
• If [Face/Point/Point] is selected, extraction will be  
performed in the order of face, point and point.  
• If [Face/Point/Line] is selected, extraction will be  
performed in the order of face, point and line.  
• If [Face/Line/Line] is selected, extraction will be  
performed in the order of face, line and line.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
When all the elements are extracted, they will  
be displayed in the new coordinate system.  
And [Confirmation (for Coordinate)] dialog box  
will appear.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – To X-Y-Z  
Save the coordinate system.  
5
If you selected [Point/Point/Point]:  
• Once you have extracted the three points, the  
program displays the input design values and the  
standard deviations of the extracted points.  
Click [Yes] to continue.  
Click [No] if you wish to re-enter the design  
values.  
If you selected [Face/Point/Point], [Face/Point/  
Line], [Face/Line/Line]:  
Chapter  
2
• You can use the [Reverse] button to invert the  
normal vector of the face that you extracted in  
Step 4 above. If you select [Reverse], the program will  
invert the face, recalculate the coordinate system, and  
then redraw the display accordingly.  
Build  
Menu  
Click the right mouse button.  
The [Question] dialog box will appear.  
6
7
Click the [OK] button.  
Coordinate conversion will be performed.  
Parameters for [Build-Move-To X-Y-Z] Dialog Box  
You set up a new coordinate system by extracting three points, one at a time, from among the  
Point/Point/Point  
Face/Point/Point  
Face/Point/Line  
selected points. The program generates the origin and axes of the new coordinate system based on  
the coordinate positions and design values of the three extracted points.  
Extracts a face and two points from the selected points sequentially to set a new coordinate sys-  
tem. Two axes and origin on the face are calculated based on the attribute of face and the coordi-  
nate/design values of the extracted points to generate a new coordinate system.  
Extracts a face, point, and line (in that order) from the selected points set. Calculates the origin  
or the new coordinate system based on the face attribute and the coordinate/design values of the  
extracted points; determines a single axis from the extracted line attribute; and generates the new  
coordinate system accordingly.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Extracts a face and two lines from the selected points sequentially to set a new coordinate system.  
The origin and two axes are calculated based on the attribute of face and two lines to generate a  
new coordinate system.  
Face/Line/Line  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – To X-Y-Z  
n Extracting a Face  
Extract a face from the selected points as explained below.  
Operating Procedure The following steps must be carried out in Build – Move – To X-Y-Z mode.  
Select the desired points.  
1
Memo  
• Select the points using the Select and View menu com-  
mands.  
• After operation, please cancel the Select or View menu  
command.  
Chapter  
2
Click the right mouse button.  
The [Select Face Attribute] dialog box will ap-  
pear.  
2
3
Build  
Menu  
Select the desired face attribute from  
the pull-down menu.  
When the selected attribute of the face is “XY-  
Plane”, Z-Axis is made in agreement with the  
face normal.  
But the direction of the axis is calculated by  
the algorithm. If the direction is not suitable,  
click the [Reverse] button in [Confirmation(for  
coordinate)] dialog box to reverse the axis  
direction.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The generated face will be displayed, and the  
[Confirmation] dialog box will appear.  
4
5
Click the [OK] button.  
Proceed to the extraction procedure for the  
next element (point or line).  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Parameters for [Select Face Attribute] Dialog Box  
Generates a XY plane based on the selected points.  
Generates a YZ plane based on the selected points.  
XY-Plane  
YZ-Plane  
ZX-Plane  
Generates a ZX plane based on the selected points.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – To X-Y-Z  
n Extracting a Point  
Extract a point from the selected points as explained below.  
Operating Procedure The following steps must be carried out in Build – Move – To X-Y-Z mode.  
Select the desired points.  
1
Memo  
• Select the points using the Select and View menu com-  
mands.  
• After operation, please cancel the Select or View menu  
command.  
Chapter  
2
Click the right mouse button.  
The [Select Point Type] dialog box will appear.  
2
3
Select the desired point type from the  
pull-down menu.  
Build  
Menu  
Click the [OK] button.  
The [Input XYZ Value] dialog box will appear.  
4
5
Enter the design values for the point.  
Memo  
For certain types of extraction, you will only be able to  
enter values for two of three axes. For instance, if XY-  
Plane is selected, the text box for Z value will be inactive  
since it is not necessary to enter the Z-coordinate value.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The generated point will be displayed, and the  
[Confirmation] dialog box will appear.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
6
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – To X-Y-Z  
Click the [OK] button.  
Proceed to the extraction procedure for the  
next element (point or line).  
7
• When you have completed extraction of all ele-  
ments: Right-click the mouse to open the  
Question dialog, and proceed to convert to the  
new coordinate system.  
Parameters for [Select Point Type] Dialog Box  
Generates the gravity point based on the selected points.  
Gravity Point  
Generates the center of circle based on the selected points.  
Generates the center of sphere based on the selected points.  
Center of Circle  
Center of Sphere  
Chapter  
2
Build  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Move – To X-Y-Z  
n Extracting a Line  
Extract a line from the selected points as explained below.  
Operating Procedure The following steps must be carried out in Build – Move – To X-Y-Z mode.  
Select the desired points.  
1
Memo  
• Select the points using the Select and View menu com-  
mands.  
• After operation, please cancel the Select or View menu  
command.  
Chapter  
2
Click the right mouse button.  
The [Select Line Attribute] dialog box will ap-  
pear.  
2
3
Select the desired line attribute from  
the pull-down menu.  
Build  
Menu  
Click the [OK] button.  
The line direction will be displayed, and the  
[Question] dialog box will appear.  
4
5
If you want to change the direction,  
click the [No] button.  
The line direction will be changed, and the  
[Question] dialog box will reappear.  
Click the [Yes] button.  
The generated line will be displayed, and the  
[Confirmation] dialog box will appear.  
6
7
Click the [OK] button.  
Proceed to the extraction procedure for the  
next element (point or line).  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
• When you have completed extraction of all ele-  
ments: Right-click the mouse to open the Ques-  
tion dialog, and proceed to convert to the new  
coordinate system.  
Parameters for [Select Line Attribute] Dialog Box  
Generates the X-axis based on the selected points.  
Generates the Y-axis based on the selected points.  
X-Axis  
Y-Axis  
Z-Axis  
Generates the Z-axis based on the selected points.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Rotate – Elements  
Rotating Element(s)  
[R] (Effective while held down)  
This command is used to rotate the selected element(s).  
Left  
: Rotates the element(s) using the mouse.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : Rotates the element(s) along the major axis.  
Right  
: Rotates the element(s) by entering values.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element(s).  
1
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Rotate]  
and then click [Elements].  
2
The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if it  
is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to  
be displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Drag while holding down the left button.  
The element(s) will rotate at their center of  
gravity.  
• Dragging with the middle (or [Shift] + Left)  
button will rotate the element(s) along the major  
axis.  
3
4
Memo  
The element will be displayed in simple form during drag.  
It will be displayed in detailed form when dragging is  
canceled.  
Press the [ESC] key.  
Build – Rotate – Elements mode will be can-  
celed.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Rotate – Elements  
n Rotating the Element(s) by Entering a Value Directly  
To rotate the element(s) by specifying the rotating angle, follow the procedure given below.  
Note  
If Build – Rotate – Elements mode was activated using the shortcut key, the element(s) cannot be moved by this method.  
Operating Procedure  
 The following steps must be carried out in Build – Rotate – Elements mode.  
Click the right mouse button.  
The [Build-Rotate-Elements] dialog box will  
appear.  
1
Chapter  
2
Select X, Y or Z to be used as the pivot,  
and enter the desired rotating angle.  
2
3
Click the [Apply] button.  
The selected element(s) will rotate by the  
specified angle.  
Build  
Menu  
• If you change the angle and click the [Apply]  
button, the element(s) will rotate again according  
to the new angle. The new angle will not be added  
to the previous angle. It is an absolute angle from  
the original position.  
• Clicking the [Cancel] button will cancel all the  
operations that have been performed since the  
dialog box was opened.  
Click the [OK] button.  
4
The [Build-Move-Points] dialog box will close,  
movement of the point(s) will be confirmed,  
and the Build-Move-Points mode will be  
canceled.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Merge  
Merging Elements  
This command is used to merge elements that have been subjected to registration.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the elements  
to be merged.  
1
Click [Merge] on the [Build] menu.  
2
The [Build-Merge] dialog box will appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Chapter  
2
• To merge only the points selected in the elements,  
check the [With selected points] checkbox.  
Set the merge smoothness using the  
scale bar.  
3
4
5
Build  
Menu  
Click the [OK] button.  
A dialog box asking you to enter a new ele-  
ment name will appear.  
Enter the new element name, and click  
the [OK] button.  
The program merges the elements to create  
a new element. The new element is given the  
name that you just entered.  
• The elements in effect before merging started will  
be hidden.  
Note  
The element name must consist of up to 31 alphanu-  
meric characters.  
• The registrated data will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows, and will be displayed in the active  
window as well as the windows for which all the  
elements are set to be displayed.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Fill Holes – Manual  
Filling Holes Manually  
This command is to create polygon data using the mouse for the holes (i.e. areas where no data is present)  
located in the area selected in the currently displayed element.  
Left  
: Designates a point.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: Cancels designation.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Chapter  
2
Select the points on the boundary of  
the hole for which you want to create  
polygon data.  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Fill  
3
Holes] and then click [Manual].  
The system will search for holes present within  
the area of the selected points. A bar will be  
displayed during search to indicate progress. If  
a hole is found, only the points on its boundary  
will be selected.  
Build  
Menu  
• If no holes are found, a message dialog box will  
appear. Clicking the [OK] button will close the  
dialog box and exit the menu.  
Among the selected points, click the  
4
three nodes of a triangular polygon  
with the left mouse button, one by one  
in a counter-clockwise direction (when  
viewed from the front of the polygon).  
When the node is clicked, a white rubber band  
will appear between that node and the mouse  
pointer.  
Note  
• It is not possible to designate nodes if they have not  
been selected.  
• It is not possible to designate nodes of a triangle fac-  
ing opposite the adjacent polygons.  
• While a rubber band is displayed, it is not possible to  
switch the view and designate a point or change the  
window size.  
When all the three nodes are clicked, a poly-  
gon composed of those three nodes will be  
formed.  
• Selection of the points which are no longer on the  
boundary of the hole due to the created polygon  
will be canceled.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
• To cancel designation of the points or created  
polygon, click the right mouse button. By clicking  
the right button repeatedly, it is possible to return  
to the state in effect before this command was  
selected.  
When the hole is filled, click the [ESC]  
key.  
Selection state of points will remain and Build  
5
– Fill Holes – Manual mode will be canceled.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Fill Holes – Auto  
Filling Holes Automatically  
This command is to create polygon data automatically for the holes (i.e. areas where no data is present) locat-  
ed in the area selected in the currently displayed element. However, some complicated holes may not be filled.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Select the points on the boundary of  
the hole for which you want to create  
polygon data.  
2
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Fill  
Holes] and then click [Auto].  
3
The system will search for holes present within  
the area of the selected points. A bar will be  
displayed during search to indicate progress. If  
a hole is found, only the points on its boundary  
will be selected.  
Build  
Menu  
• If no holes are found, a message dialog box will  
appear. Clicking the [OK] button will close the  
dialog box and exit the menu.  
All the element view windows will be hidden,  
and the temporary window and [Build-Fill  
Holes-Auto] dialog box will appear.  
• The hole for which you want to create polygon  
data will be displayed in the temporary window.  
The points comprising the hole will be highlight-  
ed (yellow). The selected holes will be processed  
one by one, starting with the hole composed of  
the largest number of points.  
Memo  
If the number of remaining holes (Number of holes) is  
1, the [OK] button will be displayed instead of the [Next  
Hole] button.  
Note  
It is not possible to close the temporary window.  
Set the [Flatness] and [Algorithm] pa-  
rameters, and click the [Apply] button.  
The program merges the elements to create  
a new element. The new element is given the  
name that you just entered.  
4
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
A progress bar shows the progress while  
the fill is being carried out. If you click the  
progress bar’s [Cancel] button, the program  
suspends fill processing and displays a dialog  
showing results up to that moment.  
Memo  
The program retains the fill data generated up to the time  
when you clicked the [Cancel] button. If you wish to  
resume the fill operation, click the [All] button. Filling  
will then continue from the hole at which the operation  
was suspended.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Fill Holes – Auto  
• If you mchange the “Flatness” and “Algorithm”  
parameter settings and click the [Apply] but-  
ton, the holes will be filled according to the new  
parameter settings.  
• To restore the initial state (i.e. holes are not  
filled), click the [Hole Reset] button.  
• To fill all the holes, click the [All] button.  
• All the holes which have not been filled will be  
filled according to the parameter settings.  
• After filling the holes, the program closes the dia-  
log and the temporary window, and then displays  
a dialog indicating the results.  
Chapter  
2
Click the [Next Hole] button.  
The dialog box will close and a new dialog box  
will appear.  
The hole to be filled next will be displayed in  
the window.  
5
6
Build  
Menu  
Repeat step 4 until all the desired holes  
are filled.  
• If you click the [Next Hole] button without click-  
ing the [Apply] button, nothing will happen, and  
the dialog box will close and a new dialog box  
will appear.  
• If you click the [Close] button, the program will  
close the dialog box, windows, and menu. All  
hole fills that you have executed will be retained.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The dialog box and window will close, and the  
menu will be exited.  
7
All the element view windows will be dis-  
played.  
Parameters for [Build-Fill Holes-Auto] Dialog Box  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Number of points comprising the hole to be filled  
Number of nodes  
Number of holes  
Flatness  
Number of remaining holes to be filled  
A parameter provided for hole filling. Used to decide whether the hole is to be filled with flat  
surfaces or with curved surfaces. (100: Flat, 0: Curved, Default: 50)  
Algorithm  
Used to fill holes by creating meshes inside the holes.  
by curvature  
Used to fill holes by creating meshes and then replacing polygons on the boundary with the cre-  
by connecting nodes  
ated meshes.  
Used to fill holes by connecting the vertices of the holes.  
by curvature and  
replace facets  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Smooth – Element  
Smoothing the Selected Element  
This command is used to make the selected element smooth as well as to regularize surface points density.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
From the [Build] menu, select [Smooth]  
2
and then click [Element].  
The [Build-Smooth-Element] dialog box will  
appear.  
Chapter  
2
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
3
Click the [Apply] button.  
4
• If you change the parameter settings and click  
the [Apply] button again, the element will be  
smoothed according to the new parameter set-  
tings.  
The selected element will be smoothed ac-  
cording to the parameter settings and then  
displayed.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of smoothing and  
close the dialog box.  
5
Parameters for [Build-Smooth-Element] Dialog Box  
Used to set level of regularization of surface points density.  
Used to set level of smoothness.  
Weight  
Repetition  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Smooth – Points  
Smoothing the Selected Points  
This command is used to make the boundary of the points selected in the currently displayed element smooth  
as well as to regularize surface points density.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Select the desired points.  
2
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Smooth]  
and then click [Points].  
The [Build-Smooth-Points] dialog box will ap-  
3
pear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
4
Click the [Apply] button.  
5
The boundary of the selected points will be  
smoothed according to the parameter settings  
and then displayed.  
• If you change the parameter settings and click  
the [Apply] button again, the element will be  
smoothed according to the new parameter set-  
tings.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of smoothing and  
close the dialog box.  
6
Parameters for [Build-Smooth-Points] Dialog Box  
Used to set level of regularization of surface points density.  
Used to set level of smoothness.  
Weight  
Repetition  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Subsample – Uniformly – Element  
Reducing the Number of Points of the Selected Element Uniformly  
This command is used to reduce the data of the points of the selected element so that surface points density  
becomes uniform.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
From the [Build] menu, select [Subsam-  
2
ple] –[Uniformly] and then click [Element].  
The [Build-Subsample-Uniformly-Element]  
dialog box will appear.  
Chapter  
2
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
3
Click the [Apply] button.  
4
• If you change the parameter settings and click  
the [Apply] button again, the data comprising  
the element will be reduced according to the new  
parameter settings.  
The data of the points comprising the selected  
element will be reduced according to the  
parameter settings so that the surface points  
density becomes uniform.  
Memo  
In some cases, the number of vertices present after data  
reduction may not match the specified number.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of data reduction  
and close the dialog box.  
5
Parameters for [Build-Subsample-Uniformly-Element] Dialog Box  
9i  
Reduces the current number of points to the specified number. When the [Apply] button is clicked,  
the current number of vertices will be displayed. (The default for the “Number of points” param-  
eter is set so that the number of selected points will be reduced by 50%.).  
Number of points  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Among the points comprising the selected element, the points present on the boundary of the hole  
will be excluded from data reduction.  
Fix boundary  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Subsample – Uniformly – Points  
Reducing the Selected Points Uniformly  
This command is used to reduce the points selected in the currently displayed element so that surface points  
density becomes uniform.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Select the desired points.  
2
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Subsam-  
3
ple] –[Uniformly] and then click [Points].  
The [Build-Subsample-Uniformly-Points] dia-  
log box will appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not  
displayed in the active window or the windows for  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
4
Click the [Apply] button.  
5
The data of the selected points will be reduced  
according to the parameter settings so that  
the surface points density becomes uniform.  
• If you change the parameter settings and click  
the [Apply] button again, the data comprising  
the points will be reduced according to the new  
parameter settings.  
Memo  
In some cases, the number of vertices present after  
data reduction may not match the specified number.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of data reduction  
and close the dialog box.  
6
Parameters for [Build-Subsample-Uniformly-Points] Dialog Box  
9i  
Reduces the current number of points to the specified number. When the [Apply] button is clicked,  
the current number of vertices will be displayed. (The default for the “Number of points” param-  
eter is set so that the number of selected points will be reduced by 50%.)  
Among the selected points, the points present on the boundary of the hole will be excluded from  
data reduction.  
Number of points  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Fix boundary  
Memo  
Processing may take time if the element is composed of many points.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Subsample – Adaptively – Element  
Reducing the Number of Points of the Selected Element Adaptively  
This command is used to reduce the data of the points of the selected element so that surface points density in  
simple-shaped areas is lower than that in complicated-shaped areas.  
Memo  
The elements selected before execution of this command will be divided to triangular polygons.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
From the [Build] menu, select [Subsam-  
2
ple] –[Adaptively] then click [Element].  
The [Build-Subsample-Adaptively-Element]  
dialog box will appear.  
Chapter  
2
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not  
displayed in the active window or the windows for  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
Set the parameters.  
3
Build  
Menu  
Click the [Apply] button.  
4
• If you change the parameter settings and click  
the [Apply] button again, the data comprising  
the element will be reduced according to the new  
parameter settings.  
The data of the points comprising the selected  
element will be reduced according to the pa-  
rameter settings so that surface points density  
in simple-shaped areas is lower than that in  
complicated-shaped areas.  
• The polygons comprising the selected element  
will be triangulated.  
Memo  
In some cases, the number of vertices present after data  
reduction may not match the specified number.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of data reduction  
and close the dialog box.  
5
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Parameters for [Build-Subsample-Adaptively-Element] Dialog Box  
Reduces the current number of points to the specified number. When the [Apply] button is clicked,  
the current number of vertices will be displayed. (The default for the “Number of points” param-  
eter is set so that the number of selected points will be reduced by 50%.)  
Number of points  
The program reduces data in accordance with the value that you enter. The value serves as a gen-  
eral yardstick for the amount of reduction-induced change in model tolerance.  
Range of errors  
Memo  
The default setting is “0.2”.  
Among the points comprising the selected element, the points present on the boundary of the hole  
will be excluded from data reduction.  
Fix boundary  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Subsample – Adaptively – Points  
Reducing the Selected Points Adaptively  
This command is used to reduce the points selected in the currently displayed element so that surface points  
density in simple-shaped areas is lower than that in complicated-shaped areas.  
Memo  
The elements selected before execution of this command will be divided to triangular polygons.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Select the desired points.  
2
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Subsam-  
3
ple] –[Adaptively] then click [Points].  
The [Build-Subsample-Adaptively-Points] dia-  
log box will appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not dis-  
played in the active window or the windows for  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
4
Click the [Apply] button.  
5
• If you change the parameter settings and click  
the [Apply] button again, the data comprising  
the points will be reduced according to the new  
parameter settings.  
The data of the selected points will be reduced  
according to the parameter settings so that  
surface points density in simple-shaped areas  
is lower than that in complicated-shaped areas.  
• The polygons comprising the selected element  
will be triangulated.  
Memo  
In some cases, the number of vertices present after data  
reduction may not match the specified number.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of data reduction  
and close the dialog box.  
6
9i  
910  
Parameters for [Build-Subsample-Adaptively-Points] Dialog Box  
900  
700  
300  
Reduces the current number of points to the specified number. When the [Apply] button is clicked,  
the current number of vertices will be displayed. (The default for the “Number of points” param-  
eter is set so that the number of selected points will be reduced by 50%.)  
Number of points  
The program reduces data in accordance with the value that you enter. The value serves as a gen-  
eral yardstick for the amount of reduction-induced change in model tolerance.  
Range of errors  
Memo  
The default setting is “0.2”.  
Among the selected points, the points present on the boundary of the hole will be excluded from  
data reduction.  
Fix boundary  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Modify – Element  
Rebuilding the Selected Element by Deleting Small Polygons  
This command is used to rebuild the selected element by deleting small polygons.  
Memo  
The element selected before execution of this command will be divided to triangular polygons.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
From the [Build] menu, select [Modify]  
and then click [Element].  
The [Build-Modify-Element] dialog box will  
2
Chapter  
2
appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed in  
all windows. It will be displayed if it is not displayed  
in the active window or the windows for which all  
the elements are set to be displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
3
Click the [Apply] button.  
4
• If you change the parameter settings and click  
Polygons smaller than the specified size will  
be deleted from the selected element.  
• The polygons comprising the selected element  
will be triangulated.  
the [Apply] button again, the data comprising  
the element will be reduced according to the new  
parameter settings.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of data reduction and close  
the dialog box.  
5
Parameters for [Build-Modify-Element] Dialog Box  
Used to set the minimum edge length of polygons to be deleted.  
Used to set the minimum face area of polygons to be deleted  
Minimum edge length  
Minimum face area  
Fix boundary  
Among the points comprising the selected element, the points present on the boundary of the hole  
will be excluded from data reduction.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Modify – Points  
Rebuilding the Selected Points by Deleting Small Polygons  
This command is used to rebuild the points selected in the currently displayed element by deleting small poly-  
gons.  
Memo  
The elements selected before execution of this command will be divided to triangular polygons.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Select the desired points.  
2
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Modify]  
and then click [Points].  
3
The [Build-Modify-Points] dialog box will appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
4
Click the [Apply] button.  
5
• If you change the parameter settings and click  
the [Apply] button again, the data comprising  
the points will be reduced according to the new  
parameter settings.  
Polygons smaller than the specified size will  
be deleted from the selected points.  
• The polygons comprising the selected element  
will be triangulated.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of data reduction  
and close the dialog box.  
6
Parameters for [Build-Modify-Points] Dialog Box  
Used to set the minimum edge length of polygons to be deleted.  
Used to set the minimum face area of polygons to be deleted  
Minimum edge length  
Minimum face area  
Fix boundary  
Among the points comprising the selected element, the points present on the boundary of the hole  
will be excluded from data reduction.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Subdivision – Element  
Rebuilding the Selected Element by Dividing Large Polygons  
This command is used to rebuild the selected element by dividing large polygons.  
Memo  
The element selected before execution of this command will be divided to triangular polygons.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element.  
1
From the [Build] menu, select [Subdivi-  
sion] then click [Element].  
The [Build-Subdivision-Element] dialog box  
2
Chapter  
2
will appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not  
displayed in the active window or the windows for  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
3
Click the [Apply] button.  
4
The data of the points comprising the selected  
element will be rebuilt according to the param-  
eter settings.  
• If you change the parameter settings and click the  
[Apply] button again, the data for the selected ele-  
ment will be rebuilt according to the new param-  
eter settings.  
• The polygons comprising the selected element  
will be triangulated.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of data rebuilding  
and close the dialog box.  
5
Parameters for [Build-Subdivision-Element] Dialog Box  
Used to set the maximum edge length of element to be rebuilt.  
Used to set the maximum face area of element to be rebuilt.  
Maximum edge length  
Maximum face area  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Subdivision – Points  
Rebuilding the Selected Points by Dividing Large Polygons  
This command is used to rebuild the points selected in the currently displayed element by dividing large poly-  
gons.  
Memo  
The elements selected before execution of this command will be divided to triangular polygons.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Select the desired points.  
2
Chapter  
2
From the [Build] menu, select [Subdivi-  
sion] then click [Points].  
The [Build-Subdivision-Points] dialog box will  
3
appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not  
displayed in the active window or the windows for  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Set the parameters.  
4
Click the [Apply] button.  
5
The data for the selected points will be rebuilt  
according to the parameter settings.  
• The polygons comprising the selected element  
will be triangulated.  
• If you change the parameter settings and click the  
[Apply] button again, the data for the points will  
be rebuilt according to the new parameter set-  
tings.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of data rebuilding  
and close the dialog box.  
6
Parameters for [Build-Subdivision-Points] Dialog Box  
Used to set the maximum edge length of polygons to be divided.  
Used to set the maximum face area of polygons to be divided.  
Maximum edge length  
Maximum face area  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Triangulate – Elements  
Dividing Polygons in Elements into Triangles  
This command is used to divide polygons of the selected element(s) into triangles.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element(s).  
1
From the [Build] menu, select [Triangu-  
late] then click [Elements].  
2
Chapter  
2
The polygons comprising the selected  
element(s) will be divided into triangles.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Build – Triangulate – Polygons  
Dividing Selected Polygons into Triangles  
This command is used to divide the polygon(s) composed of the points selected in the currently displayed ele-  
ment into triangles.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the desired  
element(s).  
1
Select the polygons you want to divide  
into triangles.  
A polygon can be selected by selecting all the  
2
vertices of which it is comprised.  
Memo  
9i  
It is possible to select polygons in more than one element.  
910  
900  
700  
300  
From the [Build] menu, select [Triangu-  
3
late] and then click [Polygons].  
Polygons comprised of the selected points will  
be divided into triangles.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Texture Blending  
Blending Textures  
This command is used to make the edges of color image of registrated element smooth.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Click [Texture Blending] on the [Build]  
menu.  
2
Chapter  
2
All the element view windows will be hidden,  
and the temporary window and [Build-Texture  
Blending] dialog box will appear.  
• The temporary window is displayed in texture  
mapping mode, and the selected element will be  
fully framed in that window.  
• The selected element will be ready to be displayed  
in all windows. It will be displayed if it is not  
displayed in the active window or the windows for  
Build  
Menu  
which all the elements are set to be displayed.  
Note  
• An error message will appear if an element that has  
no images is selected.  
• It is not possible to close the temporary window.  
Set the parameters.  
3
Click the [Apply] button.  
Junctures of textures will be smoothed ac-  
cording to the parameter settings.  
4
• If you change the parameter settings and click the  
[Apply] button again, the junctures of textures  
will be smoothed according to the new parameter  
settings.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of texture blending  
and close the dialog box.  
5
Parameters for [Build-Texture Blending] Dialog Box  
9i  
910  
Sets the area over which blending occurs, with the area increasing as you raise the value.  
If you set this value too high, colors will bleed together excessively and the result will be unsatis-  
factory. If you set this value to 0, there will be no blending at all.  
Blending Area  
900  
700  
300  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Check Polygons – Element  
Checking for Illegal Polygons in Element  
This command is used to check for illegal polygons among those comprising the selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
From the [Build] menu, select [Check  
2
Polygons] then click [Element].  
The [Build-Check Polygons-Element] dialog  
box will appear.  
Chapter  
2
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Build  
Menu  
Note  
An error message will appear if more than one element  
is selected.  
Check the checkboxes of the param-  
eter items to be checked.  
3
Click the [OK] button.  
Illegal polygons will be detected and the fol-  
lowing dialog box will appear.  
4
Click the [OK] button.  
5
Only the vertices comprising the illegal poly-  
gons will remain selected, the dialog box will  
close and the menu will be exited.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Check Polygons – Element  
Parameters for [Build-Check Polygons-Element] Dialog Box  
Checks for polygons intersecting with another polygon at points other than at shared vertices and  
Intersection  
Degeneration  
Orientation  
Connection  
edges.  
ex.) Polygons intersecting with each other  
Checks for polygons whose edges intersect with each other at points other than at shared vertices.  
ex.) Triangular polygon whose three vertices are positioned on a straight line  
Chapter  
2
Vertex 1 Vertex 2 Vertex 3  
Checks for polygons that share an edge and face opposite each other.  
ex.) Polygons sharing one edge and facing opposite each other  
Build  
Menu  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Back  
Front  
Checks for polygons that share more than three vertices or two non-edge vertices.  
ex.) Quadrangular polygons sharing three vertices  
Quadrangular polygon B  
Quadrangular polygon A  
ex.) Triangular polygon having as an edge the diagonal edge of a quadrangular polygon  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Checks for polygons connected to a vertex of conical polygons.  
*All the polygons connected to a vertex will be detected.  
ex.) Triangular polygon sharing its vertex with a  
conical polygon  
Singularity  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Check Polygons – Polygons  
Checking for Illegal Polygons Composed of Selected Points  
This command is used to check illegal polygons composed of the selected points in the selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Select the points that contain polygons  
to be checked  
Only the polygons for which all vertices are  
2
Chapter  
2
selected will be checked.  
From the [Build] menu, select [Check  
3
Polygons] and then click [Polygons].  
The [Build-Check Polygons-Polygons] dialog  
box will appear.  
Build  
Menu  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Note  
An error message will appear if more than one element  
is selected.  
Check the checkboxes of the param-  
eter items to be checked.  
4
Click the [OK] button.  
Illegal polygons will be detected and the fol-  
lowing dialog box will appear.  
5
Click the [OK] button.  
6
Only the vertices comprising the illegal poly-  
gons will remain selected, the dialog box will  
close and the menu will be exited.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Build – Check Polygons – Polygons  
Parameters for [Build-Check Polygons-Polygons] Dialog Box  
Checks for polygons intersecting with another polygon at points other than at shared vertices and  
Intersection  
Degeneration  
Orientation  
Connection  
edges.  
ex.) Polygons intersecting with each other  
Checks for polygons whose edges intersect with each other at points other than at shared vertices.  
ex.) Triangular polygon whose three vertices are positioned on a straight line  
Chapter  
2
Vertex 1 Vertex 2 Vertex 3  
Checks for polygons that share an edge and face opposite each other.  
ex.) Polygons sharing one edge and facing opposite each other  
Build  
Menu  
Front  
Front  
Front  
Back  
Front  
Checks for polygons that share more than three vertices or two non-edge vertices.  
ex.) Quadrangular polygons sharing three vertices  
Quadrangular polygon B  
Quadrangular polygon A  
ex.) Triangular polygon having as an edge the diagonal edge of a quadrangular polygon  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Checks for polygons connected to a vertex of conical polygons.  
*All the polygons connected to a vertex will be detected.  
ex.) Triangular polygon sharing its vertex with a  
conical polygon  
Singularity  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Build  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Info Menu  
Chapter  
2
Elements ……………………………………………………………………………… 222  
Points ………………………………………………………………………………… 223  
Picked Point ………………………………………………………………………… 224  
Info  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Info – Elements  
Displaying Information for the Element(s)  
This command is used to display information related to the selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Click [Element] on the [Info] menu.  
The [Info-Element] dialog box will appear.  
2
If you want to change the element  
name, enter a new name.  
Chapter  
2
3
Click the [OK] button.  
The dialog box will close.  
4
Info  
Menu  
Parameters for [Info-Elements] Dialog Box  
Name of the element  
Element name  
Points  
Number of points comprising the element  
Number of polygons comprising the element  
Element’s surface area  
Polygons  
Surface  
Volume  
Date  
Element’s volume  
Acquisition date (“N/A” will be displayed in the case of merged element data)  
Acquisition time (“N/A” will be displayed in the case of merged element data)  
Time  
Image No. (for the image whose information is displayed)/Total number of images  
Size of the image  
Image  
Size  
Coordinates of the view point  
Vector of the line of view  
View point  
Direction  
Up Vector  
Focal length  
Previous  
Next  
Upward vector  
Focal distance  
9i  
Displays information for the previous image.  
Displays information for the next image.  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Memo  
The program calculates the surface area by calculating the  
triangles comprising the element, and then summing the  
surface areas of these triangles.  
The program calculates the volume by estimating the  
volume enclosed by the polygons comprising the element.  
Results may not be precise if elements have many broken  
parts.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Info – Points  
Displaying Information for Points  
This command is used to display information related to the points comprising the polygon selected in the  
selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select one desired  
element.  
1
Select the desired point(s).  
2
Click [Points] on the [Info] menu.  
Chapter  
2
3
The [Info-Points] dialog box will appear.  
• The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if  
it is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to be  
displayed.  
Info  
Menu  
Note  
Information for up to 20,000 points can be viewed. If the  
number of selected points exceeds 20,000, the informa-  
tion for those extra points will be omitted.  
If you wish to output the displayed in-  
4
formation, click the [Export] button.  
The program outputs the point coordinate  
data, in ASCII format.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The dialog box will close.  
5
Parameters for [Info-Points] Dialog Box  
Serial No. of each point  
No.  
X, Y and Z coordinates  
X, Y, Z  
Name of the element to which the point(s) belong  
Element name  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Info – Picked Point  
Displaying Information for the Picked Point  
This command is used to display information related to a point selected by clicking it.  
Left  
: Selects one point.  
Middle ([Shift] + Left) : –  
Right  
: –  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the de-  
sired element.  
1
2
Chapter  
2
Click [Picked Point] on the [Info] menu.  
The selected element will be ready to be dis-  
played in all windows. It will be displayed if it  
is not displayed in the active window or the  
windows for which all the elements are set to  
be displayed.  
Click the point whose information you  
want to display.  
The information of the left-clicked point will be  
Info  
Menu  
3
4
displayed.  
Press the [ESC] key.  
Info – Picked Point mode will be canceled.  
Parameters for [Info-Picked Point] Dialog Box  
Serial No. of each point  
No.  
X, Y and Z coordinates  
X Y Z  
Element  
Name of the element to which the point(s) belong  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window Menu  
Chapter  
2
New – Front/Right/Left/Back/Top/Bottom/Isometric/Perspective…………………… 226  
Clone ………………………………………………………………………………… 226  
Close ………………………………………………………………………………… 227  
Cascade ……………………………………………………………………………… 227  
Tiling ………………………………………………………………………………… 228  
Layout – 1/4 ………………………………………………………………………… 228  
Layout – 1/1 ………………………………………………………………………… 228  
Layout – Format A …………………………………………………………………… 229  
Layout – Format B …………………………………………………………………… 229  
Property ……………………………………………………………………………… 230  
Next ………………………………………………………………………………… 232  
Previous ……………………………………………………………………………… 232  
Window  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window – New – Front/Right/Left/Back/Top/Bottom/Isometric/Perspective  
Changing Direction of View of Element View Window  
This command is used to open a new window by selecting the orientation of the image displayed in the win-  
dow from [Front], [Right], [Left], [Back], [Top], [Bottom], [Isometric] and [Perspective].  
Operating Procedure  
From the [Window] menu, select [New]  
and then click [Front], [Right], [Left],  
[Back], [Top], [Bottom], [Isometric] or  
1
[Perspective].  
Memo  
A new window will open in the selected view  
orientation.  
• It is possible to open two or more windows having the  
same orientation.  
Chapter  
2
• If [Perspective] or [Isometric] is selected, the image  
can be rotated in different directions using a View com-  
mand.  
The data will be fully framed in the new window.  
Window  
Menu  
Window – Clone  
Cloning an Element View Window  
This command is used to clone (duplicate) the active element view window.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Clone] on the [Window] menu.  
The active window will be cloned.  
1
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window – Close  
Closing Active Element View Window  
This command is used to close the active element view window.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Close] on the [Window] menu.  
The active window will close.  
1
• If only one element view window is present and  
modifications have been made to an element after  
it has been imported or saved, the “Some ele-  
ments are modified. Do you want to save them?”  
message dialog box will appear.  
Chapter  
2
q Click the [YES] button.  
If an element file has been imported, its data  
will be overwritten.  
If the selected elements are not those explained  
above (i.e. if they are newly created elements  
or those that have been imported in another file  
format), the [File-Save as-Elements] dialog box  
will appear, displaying the names of the non-  
saved elements at the top of the element list. (If  
you want to change the file names, change them)  
Click the [Save] button to save them one by one.  
When all the elements are saved, the dialog box  
and the selected windows will close.  
Window  
Menu  
Window – Cascade  
Cascading Element View Windows  
This command is used to cascade all the currently displayed windows.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Cascade] on the [Window] menu.  
1
The currently displayed windows will be cas-  
caded from the top left to bottom right in the  
element view window area.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window – Tiling  
Tiling Element View Windows  
This command is used to tile all the currently displayed windows.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Tiling] on the [Window] menu.  
The currently displayed windows will be fully  
tiled in the element view window area.  
1
Chapter  
2
Window – Layout – 1/4  
Displaying an Element View Windows in 1/4 Layout  
This command is used display windows in 1/4 layout.  
Operating Procedure  
Window  
Menu  
From the [Window] menu, select [Lay-  
out] and then click [1/4].  
1
Four views will appear, with Top view in the  
top left, Isometric view in the top right, Front  
view in the bottom left and Right view in the  
bottom right.  
Window – Layout – 1/1  
Displaying an Element View Window in 1/1 Layout  
This command is used to fully display a window in the element view window area.  
Operating Procedure  
9i  
From the [Window] menu, select [Lay-  
out] and then click [1/1].  
The active window will be maximized and dis-  
played fully in the element view window area.  
1
910  
900  
700  
300  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window – Layout – Format A  
Displaying an Element View Window in Format A Layout  
This command is used to display windows in Format A layout.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [Window] menu, select [Lay-  
out] and then click [Format A].  
1
All the windows except for the active window  
will close, and a window having the same  
display properties of that active window will be  
created. It will be displayed in Format A from  
certain different viewing angles.  
Chapter  
2
Window  
Menu  
Window – Layout – Format B  
Displaying an Element View Window in Format B Layout  
This command is used to display windows in “Format B” layout.  
Operating Procedure  
From the [Window] menu, select [Lay-  
1
out] and then click [Format B].  
All the windows except for the active window  
will close, and a window having the same  
display properties of that active window will  
be created. It will be displayed in the for-  
mat shown on the right from certain viewing  
angles.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window – Property  
Displaying Window Properties  
This command is used to display and set various types of information related to all the currently displayed  
windows.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Property] on the [Window] menu.  
The [Window – Property] dialog box will ap-  
pear.  
1
Set the parameters.  
2
Clicking the [View reset] button will change the  
Camera Settings as follows:  
• Interest: 0.000, 0.000, -1000.000  
• Near plane: 500.000  
Chapter  
2
• Far plane: 5000.000  
• View angle: 45.0  
To change the element for only the windows  
Note  
for which parameters have been set, check the  
For window views other than “Isometric” or “Perspec-  
[Select] checkbox and place a check mark for  
those elements.  
“Selective” will appear in the window’s title  
bar.  
tive” view, it is not possible to set [View angle] and  
certain “View point” and Interest” parameters.  
Window  
Menu  
• For “Front” and “Back” views, only [Z] parameter  
can be set.  
• For “Top” and “Bottom” views, only [Y] parameter  
• For those elements set in the element list to be  
can be set.  
hidden, it is not possible to set them to be shown  
• For “Right” and “Left” views, only [X] parameter can  
by checking the [Select] checkbox.  
be set.  
• The [Flat] and [Smooth] radio buttons cannot be  
• For “Isometric” view, all parameters other than  
selected if Wireframe is selected as Rendering  
[View angle] can be set.  
mode.  
• For “Perspective” view, all the parameters can be set.  
Click the [Apply] button.  
The windows will be updated according to the  
parameter settings  
• If you change the parameter settings and click the  
[Apply] button again, the windows will be up-  
dated according to the new parameter settings.  
3
4
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of window property  
change and close the dialog box.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window – Property  
Parameters for [Window – Property] Dialog Box  
Click the pull-down menu, and select the desired view mode from [Front], [Back], [Top], [Bottom],  
View mode  
[Right], [Left], [Isometric] and [Perspective] from the list that appears.  
Click the pull-down menu, and select the desired rendering mode from [Wireframe], [Shading],  
[Texture Mapping], [Wireframe + Shading] and [Wireframe + Texture Mapping].  
Rendering mode  
Parameters for Camera Settings  
Camera position  
View point  
Interest  
Position of the point of interest  
Position (distance from camera) at which subject becomes visible  
Position (distance from camera) at which subject goes out of sight  
View angle of the camera  
Near plane  
Far plane  
View angle  
Parameters for Display  
Select  
Chapter  
2
Used to select the elements to be displayed in windows.  
Used to set whether to show or hide vertices.  
Points  
Used to set whether to show or hide normal.  
Normal  
Used to select flat shading or smooth shading by the [Flat] and [Smooth] radio buttons.  
Shading  
Window  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window – Next  
Displaying Next Element View Window  
This command is used to switch the next window to the active window.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Next] on the [Window] menu.  
1
Among the windows listed in the [Window]  
menu, the window listed below the currently  
active window will be active.  
Chapter  
2
Window  
Menu  
Window – Previous  
Displaying Previous Element View Window  
This command is used to switch the previous window to the active window.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Previous] on the [Window] menu.  
1
Among the windows listed in the [Window]  
menu, the window listed above the currently  
active window will be active.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool Menu  
Chapter  
2
Measure ……………………………………………………………………………… 234  
Menu Add …………………………………………………………………………… 241  
Menu Del …………………………………………………………………………… 241  
Shortcut Keys ………………………………………………………………………… 242  
Tool  
Menu  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Measure  
Measuring Dimensions within the Selected Element(s)  
This command measures specified dimensions within the selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
From the element list, select the de-  
sired elements  
1
Select the [Measure] from the [Tool]  
menu.  
The [Tool – Measure] dialog box will appear.  
2
Chapter  
2
Select the type of measurement you  
want to perform by checking on the  
radio button.  
3
Memo  
The measurement results is displayed in the upper-right win-  
dow. Note that the content of this window can be edited.  
The measurement procedure is indicated sequentially in  
the Status window.  
Tool  
Menu  
Click the [Exit] button.  
Tool – Measure mode will be canceled.  
4
Parameters for [Tool-Measure] Dialog Box  
Measures the distance between multiple points on the element (the distance between two selected  
points, or the dimensions of the “bounding box” fitted to three or more selected points).  
Measures the distance between a specified point and a selected face (where the face is specified by  
selection of multiple points).  
Points  
Point to Face  
Measures the angle formed by three specified points.  
Angle  
Circle  
Measures the circle formed by multiple points (the circle defined by three specified points, or the  
circle formed by fitting of multiple selected points.)  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Measure  
n Measuring the Distance Between Two Points ([Points])  
Use the following procedure to measure the distance between two specified points on the selected elment.  
Operating Procedure  
Check on the [Points] of the [Distances]  
category.  
1
Specify the first point on the element by  
clicking on it.  
The specified point is displayed in an element  
Chapter  
2
2
view window.  
Memo  
If you want to redo the point specifying, click the Right  
mouse button at anywhere.  
Specity the second point on the ele-  
ment by clicking on it.  
3
The distance between the two points is mea-  
sured, and the calculated results will be dis-  
played in the upperright window of the [Tool  
– Measure] dialog box, and the two specified  
points and line connecting them will be dis-  
played in an element view window.  
Tool  
Menu  
Parameters Returned When Measuring Distance Between Two Points ([Points])  
Length of the straight line connecting the two points. (Yellow line in an element view window.)  
Distance along x-axis between the two points. (Red arrow in an element view window.)  
Distance along y-axis between the two points. (Green arrow in an element view window.)  
Distance along z-axis between the two points. (Blue arrow in an element view window.)  
Coordinates of the first point. (First white point in an element view window.)  
Dist.  
dx  
dy  
dz  
Point 1  
Point 2  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Coordinates of the second point. (Second white point in an element view window.)  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Measure  
n Measuring a Bounding Box ([Points])  
Use the following procedure to measure the dimensions of the bounding box fitted to specified points on  
the selected element.  
Memo  
A “bounding box” is the rectangular box formed with the shortest boundary lines bounding the selected points.  
Operating Procedure  
Check on the [Points] of the [Distance]  
category.  
1
Select the points on the element by us-  
ing the Select menu.  
Chapter  
2
2
Ref.  
For details of Select commands, refer to page 157 to  
166.  
Click the Right mouse button.  
3
The bounding box that covers the selected  
points is calculated, and the culculated results  
will be displayed in the upper-right window  
of the [Tool – Measure] dialog box, and the  
bounding box fitted to the specified points  
will be displayed in an element view window.  
Tool  
Menu  
9i  
Parameters Returned When Measuring a Bounding Box ([Points])  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Length of the diagonal across the bounding box. (Yellow line in an element view window.)  
Length of bounding box in the x direction. (Red arrow in an element view window.)  
Length of bounding box in the y direction. (Green arrow in an element view window.)  
Length of bounding box in the z direction. (Blue arrow in an element view window.)  
Coordinate at one end of diagonal crossing the box. (White point in an element view window.)  
Dist.  
dx  
dy  
dz  
Point 1  
Point 2  
Coordinates at the other end of diagonal crossing the box. (White point in an element view win-  
dow.)  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Measure  
n
Measuring the Distance Between a Specified Point and a Specified Face ([Point to Face])  
Use the following procedure to measure the distance between a specified point and a specified face on the  
selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
Check on the [Point to Face].  
1
Select the points on the element by us-  
ing the Select menu.  
Chapter  
2
2
Ref.  
For details of Select commands, refer to page 157 to  
166.  
Click the Right mouse button.  
3
A face is fitted with the selected points, and  
the fitted face will be displayed in an element  
view window.  
Memo  
If you want to redo the face extracting, click the Right  
mouse button again.  
Tool  
Menu  
Specify a single point on the element by  
clicking on it.  
4
The distance between the specified point and  
the face is calculated, and the calculated re-  
sults will be displayed in the upper-right win-  
dow of the [Tool – Measure] dialog box, and  
the line showing the distance will be displayed  
in an element view window.  
Memo  
You can specify a different point by clicking on it.  
If you want to change the specified face, click the Right  
mouse button at anywhere.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Parameters Returned When Measuring Distance Between Specified Point and Specified Face ([Point to Face])  
Distance between point and face. (White line in an element view window.)  
Coordinates of the circle’s center point. (White point in an element view window.)  
Value of selected face’s normal vector.  
Dist.  
Point  
Plane normal  
Point on the plane  
Coordinates of a point on the selected plane. (Yellow on-face point in an element view window.)  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Measure  
n Measuring an Angle ([Angle])  
Use the following procedure to measure the angle formed by three specified points on the selected ele-  
ment.  
Operating Procedure  
Check on the [Angle].  
1
Specify the first point on the element by  
clicking on it.  
The specified point will be displayed in an ele-  
Chapter  
2
2
Memo  
If you want to redo the point specifying, click the Right  
mouse button at anywhere.  
ment view window.  
Specify the second point by clicking on  
it.  
3
4
Memo  
If you want to redo the point specifying, click the Right  
mouse button at anywhere.  
Tool  
Menu  
Specify the third point by clicking on it.  
The angle defined by the three specified points  
is calculated, and the calculated results will  
be displayed in the upper-right window of the  
[Tool – Measure] dialog box, and two lines -  
connecting the first point to second point and  
second point to third point - will be displayed  
in an element view window.  
Memo  
To calculate the next angle, click the Right mouse button  
on the next point.  
Parameters Returned When Measuring an Angle ([Angle])  
9i  
Angle formed by the three points, in degrees. (White lines in an element view window.)  
Coordinates of the first specified point. (Yellow point in an element view window.)  
Coordinates of the second specified point. (Yellow point in an element view window.)  
Coordinates of the third specified point. (Yellow point in an element view window.)  
Angle  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Point 1  
Point 2  
Point 3  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Measure  
n
Measuring the Circle Passing Through Three Specified Points ([Circle])  
Use the following procedure to measure the circle fitted to coincide with three specified points on the  
selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
Check on the [Circle].  
1
Specify the first point on the element by  
clicking on it.  
The specified point will be displayed in an ele-  
Chapter  
2
2
ment view window.  
Tool  
Menu  
Memo  
To redo the point specifying, click the Right mouse but-  
ton at anywhere.  
Specify the second point by clicking on  
it.  
3
Memo  
To redo the point specifying, click the Right mouse but-  
ton at anywhere.  
Specify the third point by clicking on it.  
4
The circle fitted to coincide with the specified  
three points is calculated, and the calculated  
results will be displayed in the upper-right win-  
dow of the [Tool – Measure] dialog box, and  
the fitted circle will be displayed in an element  
view window.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Memo  
To calculate the next circle, click the Right mouse button  
on the next point.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Measure  
n Measuring a Circle Comprised of Multiple Selected Points ([Circle])  
Use the following procedure to measure the circle created by fitting of multiple selected points on the  
selected element.  
Operating Procedure  
Check on the [Circle].  
1
Select the points on the element by us-  
ing the Select menu.  
Chapter  
2
2
Ref.  
For details of Select commands, refer to page 157 to  
166.  
Click the Right mouse button.  
The circle fitted with multiple specified point  
is calculated, and the calculated results will  
be displayed in the upper-right window of  
the [Tool – Measure] dialog box, and the fit-  
ted circle will be displayed in an element view  
window.  
3
Tool  
Menu  
Parameters Returned When Measuring a Circle Comprised of Multiple Selected Points ([Circle])  
Coordinates of the circle’s center point. (White point in an element view window.)  
Radius of the circle.  
Center  
Radius  
Value of vector normal to the circle plane.  
Circle normal  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Menu Add  
Adding a Menu  
Operating Procedure  
Click the [Menu Add] on the [Tool]  
menu.  
The program opens a file-load dialog.  
1
2
Select the appropriate menu-addition  
file.  
Operation is guaranteed only for well-formed  
menu-addition files. Operation may not pro-  
ceed correctly if you select the wrong type of  
file.  
Chapter  
2
Click the [Open] button.  
The program opens a confirmation dialog  
based on the content of the menu-addition file.  
3
4
Click the [OK] button.  
The program executes the menu addition in  
accordance with the content of the file.  
Tool – Menu Del  
Deleting an Added Menu  
Tool  
Menu  
Operating Procedure  
Click the [Menu Del] on the [Tool]  
menu.  
The program opens a menu-deletion dialog.  
1
Select the appropriate menu name from  
the list.  
2
Operation is guaranteed only for well-formed  
deletion lists. Operation may not proceed cor-  
rectly if you select an improper list.  
Click the [OK] button.  
The program deletes the selected menu.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
3
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tool – Shortcut Keys  
Displaying a List of Shortcut Keys  
This command is used to display a list of shortcut keys. By default, shortcut keys have already been assigned  
to popular commands. By using this command, you can add or modify shortcut keys.  
Memo  
Shortcut keys can also be assigned to commands given in pop-up menus.  
Operating Procedure  
Click [Shortcut Keys] on the [Tool]  
menu.  
The [Tool-Shortcut Keys] dialog box will ap-  
1
pear.  
Chapter  
2
In the [Shortcut Key] text boxes, specify  
the desired keys or combinations of  
keys.  
2
If you want to modify a shortcut key, overwrite  
• A list of shortcut keys is shown for each menu  
it. To add a new shortcut key, just enter it.  
category. To display a list for a certain category,  
• Alphabet keys, [Shift] key, [Ctrl] key and their  
click the corresponding tab with the left mouse  
combinations can be assigned. However, to use a  
button.  
function key, it cannot be assigned in combination.  
• For instance, if you press the [Ctrl], [Shift] and  
[a] keys at the same time, “Ctrl + Shift + a” will  
be displayed in the text box.  
Tool  
Menu  
To restore the following default shortcut key  
assignment, click the [Default] button.  
• [File] – [New]  
[Ctrl] + [N]  
[Ctrl] + [O]  
[Ctrl] + [S]  
[Ctrl] + [Q]  
[O]  
• [File] – [Open]  
• [File] – [Save] – [Elements]  
• [File] – [Exit]  
• [View] – [Orbit]  
• [View] – [Zoom]  
[Z]  
• [View] – [Full Frame All]  
• [View] – [Full Frame]  
• [View] – [Area Orbit]  
• [View] – [Area Zoom]  
• [View] – [Move Plane]  
• [Select] – [Rectangle]  
• [Select] – [Select by Elements]  
• [Edit] – [Undo]  
[Shift] + [F]  
[F]  
[W]  
[X]  
[A]  
[E]  
Note  
[Ctrl] + [A]  
[Ctrl] + [Z]  
[Ctrl] + [Y]  
[Ctrl] + [X]  
[M]  
• For commands to which no shortcut key is assigned,  
“None” will be displayed in their text boxes.  
• When assigning a shortcut key, an error message will  
appear if it has already been assigned.  
• Some commands do not support shortcuts that use  
[shift] + [Ctrl]. Attempting to set such a shortcut com-  
bination for these commands will produce an error  
massage.  
• [Edit] – [Redo]  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
• [Edit] – [Delete] – [Points]  
• [Build] – [Move] – [Elements]  
• [Build] – [Move] – [Points]  
• [Build] – [Rotate] – [Elements]  
[P]  
[R]  
[Popup 1] – [Show Vertex/Hide Vertex] [F9]  
Click the [OK] button.  
3
The dialog box will close, and changes made  
to shortcut key assignment will be effective.  
The changes will be saved in the user prefer-  
ence file.  
Note  
To use a shortcut key, make sure that the mouse cursor  
is located in a window in the view area.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pop-up Menus in Element View Window  
Clicking the right mouse button on an element view window while holding down the  
[Ctrl] key will display a pop-up menu, allowing you to make various settings.  
Chapter  
2
View Mode – Front/Right/Left/Back/Top/Bottom/Isometric/Perspective …………… 244  
Rendering Mode – Wireframe/Shading/Texture Mapping/  
Wireframe + Shading/Wireframe + Texture Mapping ………… 244  
Show Vertex/Hide Vertex …………………………………………………………… 244  
Show Normal/Hide Normal ………………………………………………………… 245  
Show Axis/Hide Axis ………………………………………………………………… 245  
Smooth Shading/Flat Shading………………………………………………………… 245  
Select element from window ………………………………………………………… 246  
Create clone window ………………………………………………………………… 247  
Close window ………………………………………………………………………… 247  
Property ……………………………………………………………………………… 248  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View Mode – Front/Right/Left/Back/Top/Bottom/Isometric/Perspective  
Changing View Mode  
This command is used to change view mode for windows.  
Operating Procedure  
Select [View Mode] from a pop-up  
1
menu, and then click [Front], [Right],  
[Left], [Back], [Top], [Bottom], [Isomet-  
ric] or [Perspective].  
The view mode will be changed.  
Chapter  
2
Rendering Mode – Wireframe/Shading/Texture Mapping/Wire-  
frame + Shading/Wireframe + Texture Mapping  
Changing Rendering Mode  
This command is used to change rendering mode for windows.  
Operating Procedure  
Select [Rendering Mode] from a pop-  
1
up menu, and then click [Wireframe],  
[Shading], [Texture Mapping], [Wire-  
frame + Shading] or [Wireframe + Tex-  
ture Mapping].  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
The rendering mode will be changed.  
• If Shading mode is selected, rear-facing sur-  
faces will be displayed in Wireframe mode.  
Show Vertex/Hide Vertex  
Showing or Hiding Vertices  
[F9]  
This command is used to set whether to show or hide vertices.  
Operating Procedure When Vertices are Currently Hidden  
From the pop-up menu, click [Show Vertex].  
The vertices will be shown.  
1
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Operating Procedure When Vertices are Currently Shown  
From the pop-up menu, click [Hide Vertex].  
The vertices will be hidden.  
1
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Show Normal/Hide Normal  
Showing or Hiding Normal Vectors  
This command is used to set whether to show or hide the normal.  
Operating Procedure When the Normal is Currently Hidden  
From the pop-up menu, click [Show Normal].  
The normal will be shown.  
1
Operating Procedure When the Normal is Currently Shown  
From the pop-up menu, click [Hide Normal].  
The normal will be hidden.  
1
Chapter  
2
Show Axis/Hide Axis  
Showing or Hiding Axes  
This command is used to set whether to show or hide axes.  
Operating Procedure When Axes are Currently Hidden  
From the pop-up menu, click [Show Axis].  
The axes will be shown.  
1
Operating Procedure When Axes are Currently Shown  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
From the pop-up menu, click [Hide Axis].  
The axes will be hidden.  
1
Smooth Shading/Flat Shading  
Changing Shading Mode  
This command is used to change shading mode.  
Operating Procedure When Window is Currently in Flat Shading Mode  
From the pop-up menu, click [Smooth  
Shading].  
The window will be displayed in smooth shad-  
1
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
ing mode.  
Operating Procedure When Window is Currently in Smooth Shading Mode  
From the pop-up menu, click [Flat  
Shading].  
The window will be displayed in flat shading  
1
mode.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select element from window  
Changing Displayed Element by Windows  
This command is used to switch the currently selected element to another. This is possible only for the win-  
dow in which a pop-up menu is displayed.  
Note  
For those elements set in the element list to be hidden, it is not possible to set them to be shown by checking the [Select]  
checkbox.  
Operating Procedure  
From the pop-up menu, click [Select  
element from window].  
1
The [Element to be shown] dialog will appear.  
• If all the elements are set to be shown (i.e. not set  
to “Selective”), the dialog box will appear with  
the [Select] checkbox unchecked.  
Chapter  
2
Otherwise, the dialog box will appear with the  
[Select] checkbox checked.  
Check the [Select] checkbox (i.e. a  
2
check mark is placed).  
This allows you to set whether to show or hide  
elements.  
Check the checkbox of the desired ele-  
ments to be shown.  
3
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
Click the [OK] button.  
The dialog box will close and the selected ele-  
ments will be displayed.  
4
“Selective” will appear in the window’s title  
bar.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Create clone window  
Cloning an Element View Window  
This command is used to clone (duplicate) the active element view window.  
Operating Procedure  
From the pop-up menu, click [Create  
clone window].  
The active window will be cloned.  
1
Chapter  
2
Close window  
Closing an Element View Window  
This command is used to close the currently selected element view window.  
Operating Procedure  
From the pop-up menu, click [Close  
window].  
The currently selected element view window  
1
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
• If only one view window is present and modifica-  
tions have been made to an element after it has  
been imported or saved, the [Some elements are  
modified. Do you want to save them?] message  
dialog box will appear.  
will close.  
Press [YES].  
If an element file has been imported, its data will  
be overwritten.  
If they are newly created elements or those that  
have been imported in another file format, the  
[File-Save as-Elements] dialog box will appear,  
displaying the names of the non-saved elements at  
the top of the element list. (If you want to change  
the file names, change them.) Click the [Save]  
button to save them one by one.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
When all the elements are saved, the dialog box  
and the selected windows will close.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Property  
Displaying Window Properties  
This command is used to display and set various types of information related to all the currently displayed  
windows.  
Memo  
This command has the same functions as the Window – Property command.  
Ref.  
For details of the Window – Property command, refer to page 230.  
Operating Procedure  
From the pop-up menu, click [Property].  
The [Window – Property] dialog box will ap-  
pear.  
1
Chapter  
2
Set the parameters.  
2
Click the [Apply] button.  
3
• If you change the parameter settings and click the  
[Apply] button again, the windows will be up-  
dated according to the new parameter settings.  
Click the [OK] button.  
This will confirm execution of window property  
change and close the dialog box.  
4
Pop-up Menus  
in Element View  
Window  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pop-up Menus in Element List  
Clicking the right mouse button on the element list while holding down the [Ctrl] key will  
display a pop-up menu, allowing you to make various settings.  
Chapter  
2
Show Element/Hide Element ………………………………………………………… 250  
Delete Elements ……………………………………………………………………… 250  
View Image ………………………………………………………………………… 251  
Set Wireframe Color ………………………………………………………………… 251  
Set Shading Color …………………………………………………………………… 252  
Rename Element …………………………………………………………………… 252  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element List  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Show Element/Hide Element  
Showing/Hiding Elements  
This command is used to show or hide the element(s) selected in the element list.  
Memo  
This command has the same effect as when a check mark is placed for the desired elements in the element list.  
Note  
If a pop-up menu is displayed in areas other than element name area in the element list, the menu items [Show Element]  
and [Hide Element] will not be displayed.  
[Operating Procedure When Elements are Currently Hidden  
Click the element(s) to be shown with  
1
the right mouse button, and select  
[Show Element] from the pop-up menu  
that appears.  
Chapter  
2
The element(s) will be shown.  
[Operating Procedure] When Elements are Currently Shown  
Click the desired element(s) to be hid-  
1
den with the right mouse button, and  
select [Hide Element] from the pop-up  
menu that appears.  
The element(s) will be hidden.  
Delete Elements  
Deleting Elements from the Element List  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element List  
This command is used to delete the element(s) selected from the element list.  
Memo  
The Delete Elements command has the same function as the File – Remove Elements and Edit – Delete – Elements command.  
Ref.  
  For details of the File – Remove Elements command, refer to page 141.  
  For details of the Edit – Delete – Elements command, refer to page 169.  
Operating Procedure  
Click the element(s) to be deleted with  
1
the right mouse button, and select [De-  
lete Elements] from the pop-up menu  
that appears.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
A message asking you whether to delete all  
the selected elements will appear.  
Memo  
If two or more elements have been selected by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key, they  
can be deleted.  
Click the [OK] button.  
All the selected elements and their corre-  
sponding points will be removed.  
2
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View Image  
Displaying Color Images  
This command is used to display color images of the element(s) currently selected in the element list.  
Operating Procedure  
Click the desired element(s) whose  
1
color images are to be shown with the  
right mouse button, and select [View  
Image] from the pop-up menu that ap-  
pears.  
The color images of the selected element(s)  
will be displayed.  
Memo  
Chapter  
2
If two or more elements have been selected by clicking  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key, the  
color images for those elements can be displayed.  
Set Wireframe Color  
Changing Wireframe Color  
This command is used to set the wireframe color for the element(s) selected in the element list.  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element List  
Note  
If a pop-up menu is displayed without elements selected in the element list, [Set Wireframe Color] will not be displayed  
in the menu.  
Operating Procedure  
Click the element(s) for which you want  
to set wireframe color with the right  
mouse button, and select [Set Wire-  
1
frame Color] from the pop-up menu  
Memo  
If two or more elements have been selected by clicking  
that appears.  
A color palette dialog box will appear.  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key, the  
wireframe color for those elements can be set.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
Select the desired color from the color  
palette.  
2
Click the [OK] button.  
3
The wireframe color(s) for the selected element(s) will be  
changed to the one selected at step 2.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Shading Color  
Changing Shading Color  
This command is used to set the shading color for the element(s) selected in the element list.  
Note  
If a pop-up menu is displayed without elements selected in the element list, [Set Shading Color] will not be displayed  
in the menu.  
Operating Procedure  
Click the element(s) for which you  
want to set shading color with the right  
1
Memo  
mouse button, and select [Set Shading  
If two or more elements have been selected by clicking  
Color] from the pop-up menu that ap-  
pears.  
A color palette dialog box will appear.  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key, the  
shading color for those elements can be set.  
Chapter  
2
Select the desired color from the color  
palette.  
2
Click the [OK] button.  
3
The shading color(s) for the selected  
element(s) will be changed to the one selected  
at step 2.  
Rename Element  
Changing an Element Name  
Pop-up Menus  
in Element List  
This command is used to rename the element(s) currently selected in the element list.  
Memo  
It is also possible to rename an element by double-clicking it in the element list with the right mouse button.  
Note  
If a pop-up menu is displayed without elements selected in the element list, [Rename Element] will not be displayed in  
the menu.  
Operating Procedure  
Click the element(s) to be renamed with  
1
the right mouse button, and select [Re-  
name Element] from the pop-up menu  
that appears.  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
It is now possible to enter a new element  
name.  
Memo  
Note  
If two or more elements have been selected by clicking  
The element name must consist of up to 31 alphanu-  
them while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key, they  
meric characters.  
can be renamed.  
Enter the desired element name, and  
press the [ENTER] key.  
The element will be renamed.  
2
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pop-up Menus in Image Window  
Clicking the right mouse button on an image window while holding down the [Ctrl] key  
will display a pop-up menu, allowing you to make various settings.  
Chapter  
2
Change Image ………………………………………………………………………… 254  
Overlay ……………………………………………………………………………… 254  
Zoom In ……………………………………………………………………………… 254  
Zoom Out …………………………………………………………………………… 255  
Actual Pixels ………………………………………………………………………… 255  
Close ………………………………………………………………………………… 255  
Pop-up Menus  
in Image Window  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change Image  
Changing the Color Image  
This command is used to change the currently displayed color image with a new one.  
Operating Procedure  
From the pop-up menu, click [Change  
Image].  
A sub menu will appear.  
1
Select the desired color image.  
The currently displayed color image will be  
replaced with the selected one.  
2
Chapter  
2
Overlay  
Displaying Wireframe on a Color Image  
This command is used to overlay wireframe on the currently displayed color image.  
Operating Procedure  
From the pop-up menu, click [Overlay].  
Wireframe will be overlaid on the element im-  
age.  
1
Note  
However, if the currently displayed color image is the  
one that has been added to the data taken by the VIVID  
(VI) series digitizer, no wireframe will be displayed.  
Pop-up Menus  
in Image Window  
Zoom In  
Changing the Color Image  
This command is used to enlarge the currently displayed color image.  
Operating Procedure  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
From the pop-up menu, click [Zoom In].  
1
The color image will be enlarged in steps by  
the following magnification ratio each time this  
command is selected.  
1/12, 1/8, 1/6, 1/4, 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,  
7 and 8  
• If the image is enlarged beyond the image win-  
dow, a scroll bar will appear.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Zoom Out  
Reducing the Color Image  
This command is used to reduce the currently displayed color image.  
Operating Procedure  
From the pop-up menu, click [Zoom  
Out].  
1
The color image will be reduced in steps by  
the following magnification ratio each time this  
command is selected.  
1/12, 1/8, 1/6, 1/4, 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,  
7 and 8  
Chapter  
2
Actual Pixels  
Displaying the Color Image in One-to-One Pixel Mode  
This command is used to display color images in one-to-one pixel mode (one data pixel = one monitor pixel).  
Operating Procedure  
From the pop-up menu, click [Actual  
Pixels].  
The color images will be displayed in one-to-  
1
one pixel mode.  
Pop-up Menus  
in Image Window  
Close  
Changing the Color Image  
This command is used to close the currently displayed color image.  
Operating Procedure  
9i  
From the pop-up menu, click [Close].  
The color image will close.  
1
910  
900  
700  
300  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Pop-up Menus  
in Image Window  
9i  
910  
900  
700  
300  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Appendix  
Chapter 3 contains Error Message  
explanations and Technical Terms  
glossary.  
Chapter  
3
Error  
Messages  
Explanation of  
Technical Terms  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Error  
Messages  
Explanation of  
Technical Terms  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
The following error messages appear if incorrect operation is performed or an abnormality occurs. If an error  
message appears, take the appropriate corrective actions as shown in the table below.  
Error Message (Alphabetically)  
Cause  
Action  
The digitizer was not ready due to an  
AF error.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
AF error. Laser barrier may be  
closed  
The digitizer was not ready due to an  
AF error.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
AF error.  
Failed to calculate using the specified  
corresponding points.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Calculation disable.  
*When selecting correspondence points,  
you must select points so that they are  
sufficiently spaced and so that are within  
the range that can be specified within the  
element’s colorimage window.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
The command was selected even though  
the currently displayed color image was  
the one added to the data taken by the  
digitizer.  
Cannot display wireframe.  
More than 20000 points were selected.  
Click the [OK] button to display the  
[Info-Points] dialog box. Information for  
the extra points (i.e. the points exceeding  
– 20000) will not be included.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Cannot show information of more  
than 20000 points. (Number of  
selected points – 20000) Points  
will be omitted.  
An attempt was made to extract a line  
without selecting two or more points.  
An attempt was made to extract a face  
or circle without selecting three or more  
points.  
Choose more than 2 points.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Choose more than 3 points.  
An attempt was made to extract a sphere  
without selecting four or more points.  
Failed to fill holes.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Choose more than 4 points.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Create Meshes Fault!  
(This message appears if creation of  
meshes fails with “Fillholes by meshes”  
or “Replace meshed” selected.)  
The design values of the extracted point  
are the same as those of the extracted  
line.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Design value is same as that of  
others.  
sage dialog box.  
Chapter  
3
The extracted line’s vector is the same  
as the other line’s vector.  
Click [OK] button to close message  
dialog box.  
Error  
Messages  
Extracted line’s vector overlaps  
Extracted point overlaps  
The extracted coordinate (X, Y, Z) is the  
same as the other’s coordinate.  
Fail extraction of Point, Line or Face.  
Click [OK] button to close message  
dialog box.  
Click [OK] button to close message  
dialog box.  
Extraction failure. Please select  
again.  
A write error occurred, for instance, due  
to an excessively long file path name.  
A write error occurred.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
File write error.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
File write error: user preferences.  
No preference file will be created even if  
the [OK] button is clicked.  
(The settings will be lost if this software  
is exited.)  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Message (Alphabetically)  
Cause  
Action  
File write permission error.  
An attempt was made to save a file in   
a directory for which no file write   
permission was given.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
An attempt was made to copy a file in a  
directory for which no file write permis-  
sion was given when “Copy” or “Copy/  
All” was selected.  
No write permission was given for the  
preference file or directory.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
File write permission error: user  
preferences.  
*No preference file will be created even  
if the [OK] button is clicked.  
(The settings will be lost if this software  
is exited.)  
Failed to fill holes. (Failed to divide  
holes.)  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
FillHoles Disable.  
Failed to fill holes. (This message ap-  
pears when replacement fails even if  
“Replace meshes” is selected.)  
The [Rename] button was clicked even  
though the same file name as the origi-  
nal file name had been entered.  
An attempt was made to open a file  
which cannot be read.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
FillHoles Fault! Please select other  
Algorithm.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Identical name entered. Please  
enter another name.  
sage dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Illegal format file.  
An attempt was made to enter a direc-  
tory name which did not exist.  
The memory card was not formatted.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Invalid directory.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Invalid format.  
(VIVID 700, VI-700)  
Failed to reserve sufficient memory to  
Click the [OK] button to close the  
message dialog box. Quit this software  
immediately.  
Memory allocation error.  
execute a command.  
No holes were found as a result of a  
search.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
No holes were found.  
An attempt was made to perform redo  
more than the specified times.  
An attempt was made to perform undo  
more than the specified times.  
The [OK] button was clicked even  
though no element name had been  
entered.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
No more redo. (An alarm will be  
heard if the shortcut key is used.)  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
No more undo. (An alarm will be  
heard if the shortcut key is used.)  
Chapter  
3
Error  
Messages  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box. Enter an element name,  
and click the [OK] button to open the file.  
Enter the desired file name, and click the  
button.  
No name entered. Please enter  
again.  
(“Element name”)  
The [OK], [Load] or [Rename] button  
was clicked even though no element  
name had been entered.  
No name entered. Please enter  
again.  
No memory card has been inserted.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
No memory card. Please insert a  
card.  
sage dialog box.  
(VIVID 700, VI-700)  
The [Scan] button was clicked without  
entering a rotating angle even though  
“Other” was selected for [Rotation step].  
Keys on the digitizer were operated  
while the monitor image was displayed.  
Power was turned Off then turned On or  
the memory card was replaced.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
No step angle entered. Please  
enter again.  
sage dialog box.  
Stop operating the keys and click the [OK]  
button to open a message dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Not Ready for Remote.  
PC Card had reset since last  
update.  
The memory card information will be  
updated automatically.  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Message (Alphabetically)  
Cause  
Action  
A file(s) was added, deleted or renamed  
on the digitizer while the [File-Import-  
Digitizer-PC Card] dialog box was open,  
but the memory card was not updated.  
Not possible to make calculation for the  
rotary shaft using the chart’s image even  
though the [Convert] button was clicked.  
The [Convert] button was clicked even  
though no image of the chart had been  
acquired.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box. The memory card infor-  
mation will be updated automatically.  
PC Card had updated since last  
update.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please capture chart data again.  
Please capture chart data.  
Please capture data.  
sage dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
The [Convert] button was clicked even  
though no data had been acquired.  
The [Convert] button was clicked even  
though two or more shots had not been  
acquired.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Please capture more than one  
data.  
The middle mouse button was clicked  
even though no control points had been  
set.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please draw line.  
sage dialog box.  
The [OK] or [Preview] button was  
clicked even though more than six pairs  
of corresponding points had not been  
designated.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please match equal to or more  
than 6 points.  
sage dialog box.  
An attempt was made to execute the  
Build – Move – To X-Y-Z command  
without first importing an element.  
The command was selected without  
selecting two polygon mesh elements.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please read element first.  
sage dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select 2 polygon mesh ele-  
ments. (An alarm will be heard if  
the shortcut key is used.)  
sage dialog box.  
The [Rename], [Load], [Copy] or [De-  
lete] button was clicked even though no  
files had been selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select a file.  
sage dialog box.  
The command was selected even though  
no elements had been selected or ele-  
ments other than polygon mesh elements  
had been selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select a polygon mesh  
element. (An alarm will be heard if  
the shortcut key is used.)  
sage dialog box.  
Chapter  
3
The [Apply] button was clicked without  
selecting sample points.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Please select a sample point on  
the image.  
Error  
Messages  
The command was selected even though  
more than one polygon mesh elements  
had been selected or a polygon mesh  
element and an element other than poly-  
gon mesh type had been selected.  
The [Open] button was clicked even  
though more than one scene files had  
been selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Please select a single polygon  
mesh element. (An alarm will be  
heard if the shortcut key is used.)  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select a single scene file.  
sage dialog box.  
The command was selected even if no  
elements had been selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select element(s). (An  
alarm will be heard if the shortcut  
key is used.)  
sage dialog box.  
The command was selected even though  
more than one polygon mesh element  
had not been selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select multiple polygon  
mesh elements. (An alarm will be  
heard if the shortcut key is used.)  
sage dialog box.  
An element(s) other than polygon mesh  
type element was also selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select only polygon mesh  
element( s). (An alarm will be  
heard if the shortcut key is used.)  
sage dialog box.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Message (Alphabetically)  
Cause  
Action  
The [Open] or [Import] button was  
clicked even though more than one file  
of different format had been selected.  
The command was selected with no  
points selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select only same format  
files.  
sage dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select point(s). (An alarm  
will be heard if the shortcut key is  
used.)  
sage dialog box.  
The command was selected even though  
no points had been selected or points  
had been selected for only some selected  
element but not all.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select points within each  
selected element. (An alarm will  
be heard if the shortcut key is  
used.)  
sage dialog box.  
The command was selected even though  
no elements had been selected or ele-  
ments other than polygon mesh elements  
had been selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select polygon mesh ele-  
ment( s). (An alarm will be heard if  
the shortcut key is used.)  
sage dialog box.  
The command was selected even though  
no polygons had been selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select polygon(s). (An  
alarm will be heard if the shortcut  
key is used.)  
sage dialog box.  
The command was selected even though  
three or more points had not been  
selected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Please select three or more  
points. (An alarm will be heard if  
the shortcut key is used.)  
sage dialog box.  
The right mouse button was clicked  
even though more than three pairs of  
corresponding points had not been  
designated.  
The same element name already exists.  
Enter a new element name, and click the  
Same element name exists.  
Please enter another name. (“File  
name”)  
[OK] button to open the file.  
An attempt was made to enter an ele-  
ment name that already exists.  
To replace the existing element, click the  
[Replace] button.  
Same element name exists. Re-  
place?  
An attempt was made to enter a file  
name that already exists.  
To overwrite the file, click the [Over-  
write] button.  
Same file name exists.  
An error occurred with SCSI connection.  
A read error from the memory card oc-  
curred in VIVID 900/910 (VI-900/ 910).  
Among selected elements, at least one  
element that does not have a certain  
number of selected points exists.  
An attempt was made to read a file that  
had not been saved properly.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
SCSI read error.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Select more points. We need  
more than 500 selected points for  
registration.  
sage dialog box.  
Chapter  
3
Error  
Messages  
To continue to read the file, click the  
[Continue] button. *If the [Continue]  
button is clicked, an abnormal stop of the  
software may occur during reading.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Selected file “****” may be bro-  
ken. Continue?  
A SCSI error other than SCSI connec-  
tion error, SCSI command end error and  
ready error due to an AF error occurred.  
The command was selected even though  
only the polygon mesh elements that  
were defined without copying images or  
elements other than polygon mesh ele-  
ments were selected.  
Something wrong with VIVID.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
The element has no image/The  
elements have no image. (An  
alarm will be heard if the shortcut  
key is used.)  
*If both polygon mesh elements with  
images and those without images are  
selected, this error message will not be  
displayed for those elements that do not  
contain images.  
The selected element did not have any  
images when the command was se-  
lected.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
The element has no image. (An  
alarm will be heard if the shortcut  
key is used.)  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Message (Alphabetically)  
Cause  
Action  
The size of the selected image was dif-  
ferent from that of the image you tried to  
load, due to replacement of textures.  
No data points were contained.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
The size of this image is different  
from the size of selected image.  
sage dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box. The element will be  
selected.  
There are no points. The element  
will be removed. (“File name”)  
You attempted to execute the command  
on an element that has only a single  
image.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
This element does not have mul-  
tiple images.  
The shortcut key combination you at-  
tempted to set is not supported by this  
command.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
This Shortcut key about [Com-  
mand Name] is an invalid combi-  
nation. It will be reset!  
sage dialog box.  
The same shortcut key had already been  
assigned when you tried to assign it.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
This Shortcut key about [Com-  
mand Name] is exist! Please set  
another!  
sage dialog box.  
The [Open] button was clicked even  
though a scene file saved by the Utility  
Software VI-S1 had been selected.  
Among selected elements, at least one  
element that is composed of less than  
a certain number of constituent points  
exists.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
This version of scene file is not  
supported.  
sage dialog box.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
Too Small Mesh. We can’t get  
enough information for registra-  
tion.  
sage dialog box.  
The rotary stage is not connected to the  
digitizer or it is not turned ON.  
The type of memory card is incorrect.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Turntable not found.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Unknown PC Card  
(VIVID 700, VI-700)  
A value outside the allowable range was  
entered.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Value must be 0 < value < 10000.  
A value outside the allowable range was  
entered and the OK button was clicked.  
The SCSI command did not complete.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
Value must be –100000 < value <  
100000.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
VIVID busy.  
VIVID (VI) series digitizer is not turned  
ON, cables are disconnected, or the  
SCSI device driver setting is not correct.  
The selected element has an excessively  
small number of polygons.  
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
sage dialog box.  
VIVID not found.  
Chapter  
3
Click the [OK] button to close the mes-  
“Element name” Zero or few poly-  
gons found. Skip making LOD.  
Error  
Messages  
sage dialog box.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Explanation of Technical Terms  
n Coordinate System  
With this utility software, points located in a three-  
dimensional space are expressed using coordinate  
values of threedimensional right-handed Cartesian  
coordinates. The center of the light-receiving lens of  
the digitizer is set as the origin of the coordinates.  
+Z direction refers to the direction facing the front  
side along the optical axis, + Y direction refers to  
the upward direction and +X direction refers to the  
direction facing the right, when viewed from the  
back of the light-receiving section.  
n Window View  
This program lets you view elements using three types of views: orthogonal views (Top, Front, Back, Bottom, Left,  
Right), perspective views, and isometric views.  
Camera View  
Top View  
Back View  
Left View  
Right View  
Front View  
Bottom View  
Perspective View  
Bottom View  
n Vertex  
Vertices refer to points in a three-dimensional space. They possess three-dimensional coordinate values, and can be  
selected or unselected.  
Chapter  
3
They can also be edited (i.e. moved and deleted).  
To edit vertices, they must be selected using the [Select] menu. (For the [Select] menu, refer to page 157.)  
In addition, vertices can be shown or hidden by using the Window – Property command. (For details of the Win-  
dow – Property command, refer to page 230.)  
Explanation of  
Technical Terms  
n Polygon  
Polygons refer to areas (surfaces) enclosed by lines (edges) connecting vertices. Only triangular and rectangular  
polygons are available with this software, and they can be positioned facing toward the front or rear side.  
n Color Image  
When an image is acquired by the VIVID (VI) series digitizer, a range image containing distance data to each point  
on the surface of the object is acquired as well as a color image taken from the same view angle as the range image.  
With this software, color images possess information used to correspond picture elements to vertices based on color  
information. If images are acquired using the Remote command, color images will also be saved automatically.  
(When saving data on the VIVID 9i (VI-9i), VIVID 910 (VI-910) or VIVID 900 (VI-900), it is possible to select whether  
or not to save color images.)  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Element  
Elements refer to data consisting of points (vertices), polygons and color images*1.  
When data acquired by the VIVID (VI) series digitizer is loaded to this software, it will always be displayed as a  
polygon mesh element. In addition, use of the Edit – Define command allows you to define a part of an existing ele-  
ment as a new element. Names of elements loaded to this software and those that are newly defined are displayed in  
the element list located at the right edge of the screen.  
*1 Some polygon mesh elements do not have color images.  
For instance, a polygon mesh element created by the Edit – Define command without “Copy image( s)”  
selected does not have color images.  
n Scene  
A scene refers to information such as currently opened element, its view information (zoom setting, viewing direc-  
tion, Shades/Lines display mode), camera *2, point of interest *3 and light *4 . When a scene is saved using the File –  
Save – Scene command, all this information will be saved.  
*2 The camera indicates direction in which the image displayed in a “Isometric” or “Perspective” element  
view window is viewed. (The image displayed in “Isometric” or “Perspective” element view window is the  
image of the object viewed from the camera position.)  
The camera position can be moved using the View – Camera – Settings or View – Orbit command.  
*3 The point of interest shows the direction in which the camera views the image. By moving the point of in-  
terest using the View – Camera – Settings command, the viewing direction of the camera can be changed.  
*4 The light provides shadow for “Shades” element view windows, and two kinds of light are available: point  
light source and environmental light.  
With the default settings, the point light source is located behind and to the right of the camera. Position of  
the point light can be moved by the View – Move Light command.  
In the SHADING display mode, the intensity of the environmental light, color of the light and material of  
elements (highlight, object’s color) are determined automatically.  
n Camera Data File  
A camera data file contains data (i.e. the data before conversion to element data) acquired by the digitizer. It is pos-  
sible to set the resolution for the range image, fill holes (i.e., areas where no data exists) with points automatically  
and merge more than one data acquired at different angles using the optional turntable.  
Chapter  
3
Explanation of  
Technical Terms  
n Element File  
An element file contains data for a single element.  
n Scene File  
A scene file contains data for a scene.  
n Dynamic Range Expansion Function  
This function expands the measurement range when the VIVID 9i (VI-9i) or VIVID 910 (VI-910) performs scanning.  
The laser beam of three different intensity levels (high, middle, low) is emitted to the object, and the rays reflected  
from the object are captured by the CCD. Among the reflected rays, the data within the CCD’s measurement range  
are used to expand the entire measurement range.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9222-1750-22  
BAKAKK  
2001-2010 KONICA MINOLTA SENSING, INC.  
©
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

JBL Car Speaker LSR305 User Manual
JBL Speaker 560GTI User Manual
Johnson Controls Door S1 CD065T01 User Manual
JVC Projection Television HD 65S998 User Manual
Karcher Work Light 49 24 0100 User Manual
Keating Of Chicago Fryer 20 BB Gas User Manual
Kenwood CD Player KDC 416S User Manual
Kenwood Marine Radio TM 701A User Manual
KitchenAid Blender KFP740 User Manual
Kodak Radio 1H9659 User Manual